US20040268025A1 - Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein - Google Patents

Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20040268025A1
US20040268025A1 US10/898,333 US89833304A US2004268025A1 US 20040268025 A1 US20040268025 A1 US 20040268025A1 US 89833304 A US89833304 A US 89833304A US 2004268025 A1 US2004268025 A1 US 2004268025A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
memory
flash memory
data
address
block
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
US10/898,333
Other versions
US6999350B2 (en
Inventor
Kiyoshi Matsubara
Naoki Yashiki
Shiro Baba
Takashi Ito
Hirofumi Mukai
Masanao Sato
Masaaki Terasawa
Kenichi Kuroda
Kazuyoshi Shiba
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Renesas Electronics Corp
Original Assignee
Hitachi ULSI Systems Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP9191992A external-priority patent/JPH05266219A/en
Priority claimed from JP09390892A external-priority patent/JP3534781B2/en
Priority to US10/898,333 priority Critical patent/US6999350B2/en
Application filed by Hitachi ULSI Systems Co Ltd filed Critical Hitachi ULSI Systems Co Ltd
Publication of US20040268025A1 publication Critical patent/US20040268025A1/en
Priority to US11/245,338 priority patent/US7184321B2/en
Publication of US6999350B2 publication Critical patent/US6999350B2/en
Application granted granted Critical
Priority to US11/657,473 priority patent/US7295476B2/en
Priority to US11/860,762 priority patent/US7505329B2/en
Priority to US12/320,679 priority patent/US7965563B2/en
Assigned to RENESAS TECHNOLOGY CORP. reassignment RENESAS TECHNOLOGY CORP. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: HITACHI, LTD.
Assigned to HITACHI ULSI ENGINEERING CORPORATION reassignment HITACHI ULSI ENGINEERING CORPORATION CHANGE OF NAME (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: HITACHI VLSI ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Assigned to HITACHI ULSI SYSTEMS CO., LTD. reassignment HITACHI ULSI SYSTEMS CO., LTD. MERGER (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: HITACHI ULSI ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Assigned to RENESAS ELECTRONICS CORPORATION reassignment RENESAS ELECTRONICS CORPORATION MERGER/CHANGE OF NAME Assignors: RENESAS TECHNOLOGY CORP.
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F15/00Digital computers in general; Data processing equipment in general
    • G06F15/76Architectures of general purpose stored program computers
    • G06F15/78Architectures of general purpose stored program computers comprising a single central processing unit
    • G06F15/7807System on chip, i.e. computer system on a single chip; System in package, i.e. computer system on one or more chips in a single package
    • G06F15/7821Tightly coupled to memory, e.g. computational memory, smart memory, processor in memory
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F9/00Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units
    • G06F9/06Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units using stored programs, i.e. using an internal store of processing equipment to receive or retain programs
    • G06F9/44Arrangements for executing specific programs
    • G06F9/445Program loading or initiating
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F15/00Digital computers in general; Data processing equipment in general
    • G06F15/76Architectures of general purpose stored program computers
    • G06F15/78Architectures of general purpose stored program computers comprising a single central processing unit
    • G06F15/7807System on chip, i.e. computer system on a single chip; System in package, i.e. computer system on one or more chips in a single package
    • G06F15/7814Specially adapted for real time processing, e.g. comprising hardware timers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C16/00Erasable programmable read-only memories
    • G11C16/02Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable
    • G11C16/04Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable using variable threshold transistors, e.g. FAMOS
    • G11C16/0408Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable using variable threshold transistors, e.g. FAMOS comprising cells containing floating gate transistors
    • G11C16/0416Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable using variable threshold transistors, e.g. FAMOS comprising cells containing floating gate transistors comprising cells containing a single floating gate transistor and no select transistor, e.g. UV EPROM
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C16/00Erasable programmable read-only memories
    • G11C16/02Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable
    • G11C16/06Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for writing into memory
    • G11C16/10Programming or data input circuits
    • G11C16/102External programming circuits, e.g. EPROM programmers; In-circuit programming or reprogramming; EPROM emulators
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C16/00Erasable programmable read-only memories
    • G11C16/02Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable
    • G11C16/06Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for writing into memory
    • G11C16/10Programming or data input circuits
    • G11C16/102External programming circuits, e.g. EPROM programmers; In-circuit programming or reprogramming; EPROM emulators
    • G11C16/105Circuits or methods for updating contents of nonvolatile memory, especially with 'security' features to ensure reliable replacement, i.e. preventing that old data is lost before new data is reliably written
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C16/00Erasable programmable read-only memories
    • G11C16/02Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable
    • G11C16/06Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for writing into memory
    • G11C16/10Programming or data input circuits
    • G11C16/12Programming voltage switching circuits
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C16/00Erasable programmable read-only memories
    • G11C16/02Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable
    • G11C16/06Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for writing into memory
    • G11C16/26Sensing or reading circuits; Data output circuits
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C16/00Erasable programmable read-only memories
    • G11C16/02Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable
    • G11C16/06Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for writing into memory
    • G11C16/30Power supply circuits
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C16/00Erasable programmable read-only memories
    • G11C16/02Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable
    • G11C16/06Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for writing into memory
    • G11C16/34Determination of programming status, e.g. threshold voltage, overprogramming or underprogramming, retention
    • G11C16/3418Disturbance prevention or evaluation; Refreshing of disturbed memory data
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C16/00Erasable programmable read-only memories
    • G11C16/02Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable
    • G11C16/06Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for writing into memory
    • G11C16/34Determination of programming status, e.g. threshold voltage, overprogramming or underprogramming, retention
    • G11C16/3418Disturbance prevention or evaluation; Refreshing of disturbed memory data
    • G11C16/3427Circuits or methods to prevent or reduce disturbance of the state of a memory cell when neighbouring cells are read or written
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C16/00Erasable programmable read-only memories
    • G11C16/02Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable
    • G11C16/06Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for writing into memory
    • G11C16/34Determination of programming status, e.g. threshold voltage, overprogramming or underprogramming, retention
    • G11C16/3436Arrangements for verifying correct programming or erasure
    • G11C16/344Arrangements for verifying correct erasure or for detecting overerased cells
    • G11C16/3445Circuits or methods to verify correct erasure of nonvolatile memory cells
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C16/00Erasable programmable read-only memories
    • G11C16/02Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable
    • G11C16/06Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for writing into memory
    • G11C16/34Determination of programming status, e.g. threshold voltage, overprogramming or underprogramming, retention
    • G11C16/3436Arrangements for verifying correct programming or erasure
    • G11C16/3454Arrangements for verifying correct programming or for detecting overprogrammed cells
    • G11C16/3459Circuits or methods to verify correct programming of nonvolatile memory cells
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C7/00Arrangements for writing information into, or reading information out from, a digital store
    • G11C7/10Input/output [I/O] data interface arrangements, e.g. I/O data control circuits, I/O data buffers
    • G11C7/1015Read-write modes for single port memories, i.e. having either a random port or a serial port
    • G11C7/1045Read-write mode select circuits
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10BELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
    • H10B41/00Electrically erasable-and-programmable ROM [EEPROM] devices comprising floating gates
    • H10B41/40Electrically erasable-and-programmable ROM [EEPROM] devices comprising floating gates characterised by the peripheral circuit region
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10BELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
    • H10B41/00Electrically erasable-and-programmable ROM [EEPROM] devices comprising floating gates
    • H10B41/40Electrically erasable-and-programmable ROM [EEPROM] devices comprising floating gates characterised by the peripheral circuit region
    • H10B41/42Simultaneous manufacture of periphery and memory cells
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10BELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
    • H10B41/00Electrically erasable-and-programmable ROM [EEPROM] devices comprising floating gates
    • H10B41/40Electrically erasable-and-programmable ROM [EEPROM] devices comprising floating gates characterised by the peripheral circuit region
    • H10B41/42Simultaneous manufacture of periphery and memory cells
    • H10B41/49Simultaneous manufacture of periphery and memory cells comprising different types of peripheral transistor
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10BELECTRONIC MEMORY DEVICES
    • H10B69/00Erasable-and-programmable ROM [EPROM] devices not provided for in groups H10B41/00 - H10B63/00, e.g. ultraviolet erasable-and-programmable ROM [UVEPROM] devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C16/00Erasable programmable read-only memories
    • G11C16/02Erasable programmable read-only memories electrically programmable
    • G11C16/06Auxiliary circuits, e.g. for writing into memory
    • G11C16/10Programming or data input circuits
    • G11C16/14Circuits for erasing electrically, e.g. erase voltage switching circuits
    • G11C16/16Circuits for erasing electrically, e.g. erase voltage switching circuits for erasing blocks, e.g. arrays, words, groups
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L27/00Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
    • H01L27/02Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having at least one potential-jump barrier or surface barrier; including integrated passive circuit elements with at least one potential-jump barrier or surface barrier
    • H01L27/04Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having at least one potential-jump barrier or surface barrier; including integrated passive circuit elements with at least one potential-jump barrier or surface barrier the substrate being a semiconductor body
    • H01L27/10Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having at least one potential-jump barrier or surface barrier; including integrated passive circuit elements with at least one potential-jump barrier or surface barrier the substrate being a semiconductor body including a plurality of individual components in a repetitive configuration
    • H01L27/105Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having at least one potential-jump barrier or surface barrier; including integrated passive circuit elements with at least one potential-jump barrier or surface barrier the substrate being a semiconductor body including a plurality of individual components in a repetitive configuration including field-effect components
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D10/00Energy efficient computing, e.g. low power processors, power management or thermal management

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a nonvolatile flash memory in which information is rewritable by electrical erasing/writing and a microcomputer incorporating the same.
  • memory cells constituting the EEPROM must be comprised of, in addition to memory devices such as MNOSs (metal nitride oxide semiconductors), selecting transistors and hence the EEPROM requires a relatively large chip occupation area being, for example, about 2.5 to 5 times as large as that of the EPROM.
  • MNOSs metal nitride oxide semiconductors
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,065,364 (issued on Nov. 12, 1991) shows a flash memory of the type in which an array of electrically erasable and rewritable memory cells having control gates, drains and sources is divided into a plurality of memory blocks in a unit of data line, source lines in common to each block are led out and a voltage complying with an operation is applied separately to a source line by means of a source switch provided in each source line. At that time, ground potential is applied to the source line of a block selected for writing. A voltage VDI of, for example, 3.5V is applied to the source line of a block not selected for writing. The voltage VDI guards against word line disturbance.
  • the word line disturbance referred to herein is a phenomenon that for example, in a memory cell having a word line conditioned for selection and a data line conditioned for unselection, the potential difference between the control gate and floating gate is increased and as a result, electric charge is discharged from floating gate to control gate to decrease the threshold of the memory cell transistor.
  • JP-A-59-29488 (laid-open on Feb. 16, 1991) and JP-A-3-78195 (laid-open on Apr. 3, 1991) describe an ultraviolet light-erasable EPROM in which sources of memory cells connected with the same word line are connected in common and a source potential control switch is provided for the commonly connected sources.
  • JP-A-3-78195 (laid-open on Apr. 3, 1991) describes an ultraviolet light-erasable EPROM in which sources of memory cells connected with adjacent two word lines are connected in common and a source potential control switch is provided for each adjacent two word lines.
  • JP-A-3-14272 (laid-open on Jan. 22, 1991), JP-A-3-250495 (laid-open on Nov. 8, 1991) and JP-A-2-241060 (laid-open on Sep. 25, 1990) describe division of a memory cell array in a unit to data line.
  • Programs and data are stored in a ROM incorporated or built in the microcomputer. Data is classified into data of a large capacity and data of a small capacity. When the programs and data are to be rewritten, the former data is typically rewritten in a large unit of severals of tens of KB (kilobyte) and the latter data is typically rewritten in a small unit of severals of tens of B (byte). At that time, if the flash memory is erased in a unit of chip batch or in a unit of memory block of the same size, inconvenience that the erase unit matches with a program area but is excessively large for a data area to impair ease of use thereof may occur or the converse case may occur.
  • the present inventors have studied the division of memory blocks in a unit of data line to find that the size of the minimum memory block can be decreased more easily by division into memory blocks in a unit of word line and using sources in common in a block and this is advantageous also from the standpoint of improving ease of use of the flash memory built in the microcomputer as studied firstly.
  • the division into memory blocks in a unit of data line is employed, all memory cells of a selected block for writing arranged in line and having drains connected to a data line applied with a write high voltage suffer from data line disturbance.
  • the data line disturbance is a phenomenon that for example, in a memory cell associated with a word line not rendered to be selected and a data line rendered to be selected for writing, an electric field between the source and drain is increased, so that hot holes are injected from drain to floating gate to decrease the threshold of the memory cell transistor.
  • a major object of the invention is to provide a microcomputer incorporating a flash memory which is easy to use. More particularly, a first object of the invention is to provide a microcomputer capable of making highly efficient a processing of initial write of information into the built-in flash memory. A second object of the invention is to improve rewrite efficiency of part of information held in some of memory blocks of the flash memory by eliminating wastefulness of write operation after simultaneous erasing of the memory blocks of interest. A third object of the invention is to improve rewrite efficiency by eliminating wasteful transfer operation, from the outside, of write information necessary for partial rewrite of a memory block. A fourth object of the invention is to change information held in the flash memory on real time base in synchronism with control operation by the microcomputer.
  • a rewrite control program to be executed by the central processing unit may be held in a mask ROM or a rewrite control program precedently stored in the flash memory may be transferred to a RAM and executed.
  • a processing may be effected wherein addresses of a specified area of the built-in RAM are controllably changed and arranged so as to overlap addresses of the memory block having the smaller storage capacity than the built-in RAM, that is, changed and arranged so that the overlapped RAM may be accessed when the memory block is accessed and after working has been done at the specified address, the arranged address of the RAM is restored to the original state and the contents of the memory block is rewritten with the information at the specified address of the RAM.
  • memory blocks are defined by connecting a common source line to memory cells having their control gates coupled to a single or a plurality of word lines in a unit of word line.
  • voltage output means which can control, in a unit of memory block, potential of the source line to first potential and to second potential of higher level than that of the first potential upon write operation, whereby the voltage output means applies the first potential to a source line of a memory block including memory cells having an associated data line and an associated word line applied with predetermined voltages so as to be selected for writing and applies the second potential to a source line of a memory block including memory cells having an associated data line applied with the predetermined voltage and an associated word line not applied with the predetermined voltage so as not to be selected for writing.
  • a plurality of memory blocks include a single or a plurality of large memory blocks associated with a relatively large number of word lines and a single or a plurality of small memory blocks associated with a relatively small number of word lines.
  • the large memory block and the small memory block have data lines in common and arranged separately in line, a selection circuit for selecting a data line upon write and read operations is arranged near the large memory block, a transfer gate circuit is inserted in data lines which are associated in common with the large memory block and small memory block, and a control circuit is provided which cuts off the transfer gate circuit upon write of the large memory block.
  • the information when information is initially written into the flash memory in the phase preceding mounting of the microcomputer according to the invention, the information can be written efficiently under the control of the external write device such as a PROM writer by designating the second operation mode.
  • the external write device such as a PROM writer
  • programs, data tables or control data are written into the plurality of memory blocks having mutually different capacities and defined each as a simultaneously erasable unit, in accordance with a storage capacity of each memory block.
  • the first operation mode is designated to cause, for example, the central processing unit built in the microcomputer to execute control of rewrite.
  • data of a relatively large information amount can be written in a memory block of a relatively large storage capacity and data of a relatively small information amount can be written in a memory block of a relatively small storage capacity.
  • a memory block having a storage capacity meeting the information amount to be stored can be utilized. Accordingly, even when a given memory block is erased simultaneously for rewrite of part of information held in the flash memory, such wastefulness that an information group substantially not required to be rewritten is erased concurrently and thereafter written again can be prevented as far as possible.
  • the time for simultaneously erasing a small memory block is not so short that the flash memory per se can be rewritten on real time base in synchronism with control operation by the microcomputer. But, by utilizing the built-in RAM as a work area or a data buffer area for rewrite of memory block, the same data as that rewritten on real time base can eventually be obtained in the memory block.
  • the minimum memory block When memory blocks are defined each in a unit of word line, the minimum memory block has a storage capacity which corresponds to that of one word line, regardless of the number of parallel input/output bits. Contrary to this, when memory blocks are defined each in a unit of data line, the minimum memory block has a storage capacity corresponding to the number of data lines which in turn corresponds to the number of parallel input/output bits. This signifies that the storage capacity of the minimum memory block can be reduced more easily when memory blocks are defined in a unit of word line and especially in the case of a memory incorporated in the microcomputer wherein input/output of data is carried out in a unit of byte or word, the minimum size of memory block can be reduced drastically. This contributes to further improvement in ease of use of the flash memory built in the microcomputer and consequently improvement in efficiency of rewrite of small scale data in a unit of memory block.
  • This state is referred to as data line disturbance and when the data line disturbance affects the device for a long time, the threshold of the memory device is decreased and there results an undesirable change of stored information which leads to an erroneous operation (data line disturbance fault)
  • second potential such as data line disturbance prevention voltage
  • second potential such as data line disturbance prevention voltage
  • minimization of the data line disturbance time (the time for exposure to the data line disturbance state) is effective.
  • the data line disturbance time affecting a small memory block owing to write concomitant with rewrite of a memory block having a large storage capacity is relatively increased in comparison with the converse case.
  • a microcomputer comprising a central processing unit, an electrically rewritable flash memory, flash memory rewriting I/O port means capable of being coupled to a ROM writer for rewriting the flash memory, switch means located between the central processing unit and the flash memory, and a rewriting mode decision means responsive to an externally supplied operation mode signal for controlling the switch means and the flash memory rewriting I/O port means, the central processing unit, the flash memory, the flash memory I/O port means, the switching means and the rewriting mode decision means being formed in a single semiconductor chip.
  • an electrically rewritable flash memory device comprising:
  • a memory cell array including a plurality of memory cells arranged in rows and columns, each of the memory cells including a non-volatile memory element having first and second semiconductor regions formed in a first surface portion of a semiconductor substrate, a floating gate formed over and insulated from a second surface portion of the semiconductor substrate between the the first and second semiconductor regions, and a control gate formed over and insulated from the floating gate;
  • a plurality of common conductors extending in the row direction over the semiconductor substrate, second semiconductor regions of at least two rows of memory cells being connected in common to one common conductor such that the at least one row of memory cells having their second semiconductor regions connected in common to one common conductor form a memory block, memory blocks so formed having different memory capacities;
  • a plurality of common voltage control circuits formed in the substrate, one provided for each of the memory blocks, for generating a common voltage assuming at least first and second voltage values;
  • a control circuit formed in the substrate for generating a control signal indicating which of the memory blocks is subjected to an erasing/writing operation, the control signal being supplied to the plurality of common voltage control circuits so that individual common voltage control circuits apply to their associated common conductors common voltages each having one of the first and second voltage values depending on the control signal to effect a writing operation with a common voltage of the second voltage value applied to a common conductor for a memory block which does not contain a memory cell selected for the writing operation and to effect a simultaneous erasing operation with a common voltage of the first voltage value applied to a common conductor for a memory block selected for a simultaneous erasing operation.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of a microcomputer adopting an all over flash memory.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of a microcomputer adopting a flash memory along with a mask ROM.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram drawn from the viewpoint of rewrite of a flash memory by means of a general purpose PROM writer.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram drawn from the viewpoint of rewrite of a flash memory based on CPU control.
  • FIG. 6 is a memory map showing an example of a microcomputer having a flash memory along with a mask ROM.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of the schematic control procedure of erase.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining an example of the schematic control procedure of write.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of an expedient to achieve rewrite of the flash memory on realtime base.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a manner of making partial rewrite of a memory block of the flash memory efficient.
  • FIGS. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining the principle of the flash memory.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the principle of construction of a memory cell array using memory transistors of FIGS. 11A and 11B.
  • FIG. 13 is a circuit block diagram showing an example of a flash memory in which a plurality of memory blocks are defined each in a unit of data line and having different storage capacities.
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of further details of a microcomputer corresponding to the microcomputer of FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 15 is a plan view showing the packaged state of the microcomputer of FIG. 14.
  • FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the whole of the flash memory incorporated in the microcomputer of FIG. 14.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of division into memory blocks.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining an example of a control register.
  • FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing an example of a memory read operation in the flash memory.
  • FIG. 20 is a timing chart showing an example of a memory write operation in the flash memory.
  • FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of details of the write control procedure.
  • FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of details of the erase control procedure.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining another example of division into memory blocks.
  • FIG. 24 is a memory array portion configuration diagram showing an example of a flash memory in which a plurality of memory blocks are defined each in a unit of word line, having different capacities.
  • FIGS. 25A and 25B are diagrams for explaining an advantage of the embodiment shown in FIG. 24.
  • FIGS. 26A and 26B are diagrams for explaining an example of voltage conditions for countermeasures against data line disturbance in an unselected block for writing.
  • FIGS. 27A and 27B are diagrams for explaining the principle of generation of data line disturbance and countermeasures there against.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining the change of threshold of a memory cell with respect to data line disturbance time.
  • FIG. 29 is a circuit diagram for explaining the correlation of data line disturbance time between memory blocks of small storage capacities and memory blocks of large storage capacities.
  • FIGS. 30A and 30B are diagrams showing an embodiment of a memory array in which a transfer gate circuit for selectively separating data lines is interposed between memory blocks.
  • FIG. 31 in an explanatory diagram in which an example of voltage conditions for countermeasures against data line disturbance is summed up.
  • FIG. 32 is a circuit diagram showing an example wherein a dummy word line is arranged between a memory block and a transfer gate.
  • FIG. 33 is a circuit diagram showing another example wherein a dummy word line is arranged between a memory block and a transfer gate circuit.
  • FIG. 34 is a circuit diagram showing still another example wherein a dummy word line is arranged between a memory block and a transfer gate circuit.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining a memory array in which two memory blocks are arranged on each side of a transfer gate circuit.
  • FIG. 36 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a memory array in which the number of word lines of simultaneously erasable memory blocks is increased sequentially.
  • FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining an example of a memory array in which a transfer gate circuit is arranged between a group of large memory blocks and a group of small memory blocks.
  • FIG. 38 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a memory array in which the data line structure is constructed of main data lines and subsidiary data lines.
  • FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining an example in which simultaneously erasable memory blocks are arranged on the left and right sides of an X address decoder.
  • FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining an example of a control circuit in FIG. 39.
  • FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment in which redundant words are provided in a memory block.
  • FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment in which memory blocks dedicated to redundancy are provided.
  • FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment in which some memory blocks are formed into one-time programmable areas.
  • FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment in which some memory blocks are formed into mask ROM's.
  • FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining an example of a layout pattern of memory blocks.
  • FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining a layout pattern in which transfer gate MOS transistors are provided between memory blocks.
  • FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining a pattern in which the drain of a dummy cell is floating in contrast to the configuration of FIG. 46.
  • FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining a layout pattern in which transfer MOS transistors are substantially increased in size.
  • FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of the whole of a flash memory applied with pluralization of memory blocks in a unit of word line and countermeasures against data line disturbance.
  • FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing details of a control circuit included in the flash memory of FIG. 49.
  • FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining details of a power supply circuit included in the flash memory of FIG. 49.
  • FIG. 52 is a waveform diagram showing output voltages generated from the power supply circuit of FIG. 51.
  • FIGS. 53A and 53B are diagrams for explaining details of an X address decoder included in the flash memory of FIG. 49.
  • FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining details of an example of an erase circuit included in the flash memory of FIG. 49.
  • FIG. 55 is an operational timing chart of the erase circuit of FIG. 54.
  • FIG. 56 is a timing chart of a series of operations related to erase in the flash memory shown in FIG. 49.
  • FIG. 57 is a timing chart of a series of operations related to write in the flash memory shown in FIG. 49.
  • FIGS. 58A to 58 I are longitudinal sectional views of a device at various stages of the production processes of various transistors for constituting the flash memory or the microcomputer incorporating the same.
  • FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining techniques of erasing the flash memory.
  • FIG. 60 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining a semiconductor substrate/well structure corresponding to sector erase.
  • FIG. 61 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining another semiconductor substrate/well structure.
  • FIG. 62 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining still another semiconductor substrate/well structure corresponding to sector erase.
  • FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating an overlap of a specified address area of the random access memory with a predetermined address area of the flash memory.
  • FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of a RAM control register.
  • FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an address setting for a specified address area of the random access memory.
  • FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of a chip select controller.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of a microcomputer adopting an allover flash memory (the whole of the ROM in the microcomputer being in the form of a flash memory).
  • a microcomputer MCU shown in the figure, a central processing unit CPU, a nonvolatile flash memory FMRY in which information to be processed by the central processing unit CPU is rewritable by electrical erase and write, peripheral circuits such as timer TMR, serial communication interface SCI, random access memory RAM and input/output circuit I/O, and a control circuit CONT are formed on a single semiconductor chip CHP such as silicon through known semiconductor integrated circuit production techniques.
  • the flash memory FMRY information is rewritable by electrical erase and write and like an EPROM, its memory cell can be constructed of a single transistor; and besides it has the function of electrically erasing all memory cells simultaneously or a block of memory cells (a memory block) simultaneously.
  • the flash memory FMRY has a plurality of memory blocks each defined as a simultaneously erasable unit.
  • LMB designates a large memory block having a relatively large storage capacity
  • SMB represents a small memory block having a relatively small storage capacity.
  • the storage memory of the small memory block SMB is designed to be not larger than that of the random access memory RAM.
  • the random access memory RAM can receive data transfer from the small memory block SMB to hold the information temporarily and can be used as a work area or data buffer area for rewriting. Requisite data and programs are written in the flash memory FMRY. Details of the flash memory FMRY will be described later.
  • the flash memory FMRY is allowed to rewrite its storage information under the control of the central processing unit CPU or under the control of a unit externally of the semiconductor chip CHP such as a general purpose PROM writer while the microcomputer MCU is mounted on a system.
  • MODE denotes an operation mode signal for selectively designating a first operation mode which causes the central processing unit to control rewrite of the flash memory FMRY and a second operation mode which causes the external unit to control rewrite of the flash memory FRMY and the operation mode signal is applied to a mode signal input terminal P mode on the semiconductor chip CHP.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of a microcomputer adopting a mask ROM along with a flash memory.
  • microcomputer MCU shown in the figure part of the flash memory FMRY of FIG. 1 is replaced with a mask read only memory MASKROM. Held in the mask read only memory MASKROM are data and programs which need not be rewritten.
  • a flash memory FMRY shown in FIG. 2 has a plurality of small memory blocks SMB each defined as a simultaneously erasable unit.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram drawn from the viewpoint of rewrite of a flash memory FMRY by means of a general purpose PROM writer.
  • the mode signal MODE MD 0 , MD 1 and MD 2 are indicated.
  • the mode signals MD 0 to MD 2 are supplied to a control circuit CONT.
  • a decoder included in the control circuit CONT decodes the mode signals MD 0 to MD 2 and decides whether an operation mode which does not require write into the flash memory FMRY is designated or whether the first operation mode or the second operation mode is designated.
  • the control circuit CONT performs control such that it designates I/O ports which are to interface with the general purpose PROM writer PRW and permits the external general purpose PROM writer PRW to directly access the built-in flash memory FMRY. More specifically, an I/O port PORTdata for performing input/output of data between the writer and the flash memory FMRY, an I/O port PORTaddr for supplying address signals to the flash memory FMRY and an I/O port PORTcont for supplying various kinds of control signals to the flash memory FMRY are designated.
  • control circuit CONT suppresses substantial operation of built-in function blocks having no direct relation to rewrite control by means of the general purpose PROM writer PRW, such as the central processing unit CPU, random access memory RAM and mask read only memory MASKROM.
  • the general purpose PROM writer PRW such as the central processing unit CPU, random access memory RAM and mask read only memory MASKROM.
  • connection of such a built-in function block as the central processing unit CPU to the flash memory FMRY is disconnected through switch means SWITCH respectively arranged in data bus DBUS and address bus ABUS, as exemplified in FIG. 3.
  • the switch means SWITCH can also be grasped as tristate type output circuits arranged in a circuit for delivering data from the built-in function block such as the CPU to the data bus DBUS and in a circuit for delivering addresses to the address bus ABUS.
  • Such tristate output circuits are controlled such that they are brought into high impedance condition in response to the second operation mode.
  • the built-in function blocks not being directly related to the rewrite control based on the general purpose PROM writer such as the central processing unit CPU, random access memory RAM and mask read only memory MASKROM, are brought into a low power consumption mode by a standby signal STBY* (sign* means that a signal assigned with this sign is a low active signal).
  • the power consumption mode may be set to those function blocks in response to designation of the second operation mode by means of the mode signals MD 0 to MD 2 to substantially suppress operation of the built-in function blocks not having direct relation to the rewrite control based on the general purpose PROM writer PRW, such as the CPU, RAM and ROM.
  • the I/O ports PORTdata, PORTaddr and PORTcont of the microcomputer MCU couple to the general purpose PROM writer PRW through a conversion socket SOCKET.
  • the conversion socket SOCKET has on the one hand a terminal arrangement adapted for the I/O ports PORTdata, PORTaddr and PORTcont and on the other hand a terminal arrangement adapted for a standard memory, terminals of one terminal arrangement having the same functions as those of terminals of the other terminal arrangement being connected mutually inside the conversion socket SOCKET.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram drawn from the viewpoint of rewrite of a flash memory based on CPU control.
  • a rewrite control program to be executed by the central processing unit CPU has precedently been written in the flash memory FMRY by means of the general purpose PROM writer PRW.
  • a rewrite control program to be executed by the central processing unit CPU can be held in the mask read only memory MASKROM.
  • the central processing unit CPU carries out write of data into the flash memory FMRY in accordance with a write control program written in the flash memory FMRY in advance or the rewrite control program held in the mask read only memory MASKROM.
  • FIG. 5 shows a memory map of the microcomputer having the allover flash memory (see FIG. 1).
  • a rewrite control program and a transfer control program have precedently been written in predetermined areas of the flash memory.
  • the central processing unit CPU executes the transfer control program to transfer the rewrite control program to the randam access memory RAM.
  • the processing of the central processing unit CPU branches to execution of the rewrite control program on the random access memory RAM and through this, the erase and write (inclusive of verification) of the flash memory FMRY is repeated.
  • FIG. 6 shows a memory map of the microcomputer having the mask ROM along with the flash memory (see FIG. 2).
  • the transfer program as explained with reference to FIG. 5 is unneeded.
  • the central processing unit CPU sequentially executes a rewrite control program held in the mask read only memory MASKROM to thereby repeat erase and write of the flash memory FMRY.
  • FIG. 7 shows an example of the control procedure of erase by the central processing unit CPU.
  • the central processing unit CPU performs pre-write of memory cells present within an address range to be erased (steps 71 to 74 ).
  • states of the memory cells before erase are all uniformed to written states.
  • memory cells standing for objects to be erased are erased little by little while verifying the degree of erase each time erase is completed (erase/verify) in order to prevent excessive erase, thus completing an erase operation (steps 75 to 79 ).
  • Erase by means of the general purpose PROM writer PRW can be done in a similar way. Erase sequence for the flash memory will be detailed hereinafter with reference to FIG. 22.
  • FIG. 8 shows an example of the control procedure of write by the central processing unit CPU.
  • the central processing unit CPU sets a write start address of the flash memory FMRY (step 81 ).
  • data transmitted from the outside is read through peripheral circuits designated by the rewrite control program, for example, the serial communication interface SCI or I/O ports (step 82 ).
  • the thus read data is written into the flash memory FMRY for a predetermined time (step 83 ) and the written data is read to verify whether the data is written normally (write/verify) (step 84 ).
  • the above read, write and verify of data are repeated until they are completed for a write end address (steps 85 and 86 ).
  • Write by means of the general purpose PROM writer can be done in a similar way. In this case, however, data to be written is supplied from the PROM writer PRW through predetermined ports. Write sequence for the flash memory will be detailed later with reference to FIG. 21.
  • write by the general purpose PROM writer is applied to write of initial data or an initial program used before on-board of the microcomputer MCU, that is, mounting of the microcomputer MCU into a system. This can ensure that a relatively large amount of information can be written efficiently.
  • FIG. 9 shows an example of a technique of expedient to rewrite the flash memory on real time base.
  • the flash memory because of its storage formatting, time required for erase cannot be reduced even when the storage capacity of a memory block defined as a simultaneous erasing unit is made to be small and it amounts up to, for example, several of tens of milliseconds to several of seconds. This makes it difficult to perform tuning of data by rewriting control data held in the flash memory on real time base while operating the system with the microcomputer MCU mounted thereon.
  • the built-in RAM is utilized as a work area or data buffer area for rewrite of memory block.
  • data of a predetermined small memory block SMB holding data to be subjected to tuning is first transferred to a specified address area of the random access memory RAM.
  • the microcomputer MCU is switched to a flash memory write mode of operation.
  • This write operation mode is set either by setting MD 0 to MD 2 for a predetermined value or by setting the rewrite high voltage Vpp to be applied to an external terminal to a predetermined rewrite high voltage.
  • This write mode indicates that the flash memory FMRY is in a state in which it can be written by the CPU and does not indicate that the CPU is writing the flash memory.
  • a specified address area of the random access memory RAM is overlapped with an address of a part of the predetermined small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY (step 91 ).
  • a specified address area of the random access memory RAM is overlapped with an address area of a predetermined small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY are as follows. Namely, when the flash memory FMRY stores a user program (e.g., an engine control program) and user data (e.g., engine control data), the user data are read out by the CPU in the course of execution of the user program to thereby effect engine control on the basis of the read out data.
  • the user program contains addresses of a storage area of the flash memory FMRY in which the user data are stored.
  • the addresses of the specified address area of the random access memory RAM are changed to the addresses of an area of the flash memory FMRY in which the user data to be subjected to tuning are stored.
  • the CPU executing the user program accesses the user data (data being subjected to tuning) in the flash memory FMRY, actually, the flash memory is not accessed but the specified area of the random access memory RAM is accessed.
  • FIG. 63 is a diagrammatic representation of overlap of the specified address area of the random access memory RAM with the predetermined address area of the flash memory FMRY.
  • the address space of the flash memory FMRY is represented to be between hexadecimal addresses ED00 and EE7F
  • the address space of the random access memory RAM built-in RAM area
  • “H′” indicates that the addresses are in a hexadecimal representation.
  • the specified address area (SRA) of the random access memory RAM is, for example, a 128 byte-area having addresses from H′F680 to H′F6FF.
  • the addresses of the specified address area (SRA) are, in FIG. 63, overlapped with addresses H′ECOO to H′EC7E of a part of the address area (H′ECOO to H′ECFF) of the small memory block SMB within the address space of the flash memory FMRY.
  • Such a change of address arrangement can be realized by making the decode logic of the random access memory RAM switchable in response to a predetermined control bit or setting of a flag.
  • the chip select controller CSCONT shown in FIG. 14 has a RAM control register RAMCR as shown in FIG. 64.
  • This register is an eight bit register which is readable and writable from the CPU and in which each of bits 3 to 0 has an initial value “0” and each of the bits 7 to 4 has an initial value “1”.
  • the bits 3 to 0 are made valid when the microcomputer MCU is in a write operation mode.
  • the initial values are those set in the register at the time when the microcomputer is reset.
  • the bit 3 (RAMS) of the RAM control register RAMCR determines it how the specified address area SRA of the random access memory RAM is utilized, i.e., whether the specified address area SRA of the random access memory is utilized as having its original addresses or as having addresses overlapped with those of a part of the address area of the small address block SMB of the flash memory FMRY.
  • FIG. 65 illustrates how to set addresses of the specified address area SRA by use of the RAM control register RAMCR.
  • the specified address area SRA is utilized as having its original addresses H′F680 to H′F6FF of the random access memory RAM, while when the RAMS bit is set to “1” with the microcomputer CPU being under write operation mode, the specified address area SRA is utilized as being overlapped with the addresses of a part of the small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY.
  • Bit 2 (RAM 2 ) to bit 0 (RAM 0 ) of the RAM control register RAMCR serve to determine it where in the small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY the addresses of the specified area SRA should be overlapped with.
  • the RAMS bit is reset (cleared) to “0”, the values of the bits 2 to 0 are of no significance. Meanwhile, when the RAMS bit is set to “1”, the addresses of the specified area SRA are variable depending on the values of the bits 2 to 0 .
  • the addresses of the specified area SRA are:
  • H′ED80 to H′EDFF for bits 2 to 0 being “0”, “1”, “1” and
  • tuning of control data is carried out using the specified address area SRA of the random access memory RAM which is overlapped with the address of the predetermined memory block.
  • step 92 After completion of tuning (step 92 ), the address overlapping of the random access memory RAM and memory block SMB is released, so that the address arrangement of the random access memory RAM restores its original state (step 93 ). Namely, the value of the RAMS bit of the RAM control register RAMCR is changed by the CPU from “1” (set state) to “0” (reset or cleared state).
  • This writing operation is performed by executing the write control program stored in the flash memory FMRY. Namely, data in the small memory block of the flash memory FMRY which data are to be changed or tuned are erased in accordance with the steps of the erase flow chart, as will be later described in detail with reference to FIG. 22. Thereafter, the data having been transferred to the random access memory RAM and having been subjected to the tuning are written by the CPU into the small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY (the data being written in the whole of the the small memory block SMB). In other words, the scheme which will be next described in “[7] Making partial rewrite of a memory block efficient” is employed.
  • FIG. 66 shows an example of a circuit structure of a part of the chip select controller CSCONT in which a RAM address decoder RADE and a flash address decoder FADE are coupled to address bus lines L 15 to L 7 for the higher bits 15 to 7 of the inner address bus (bit 15 to 0 ) to decode the address signal on the address bus lines L 15 to L 7 .
  • the RAM address decoder RADE decodes the signal and makes its output signal RADES high.
  • the flash address decoder FADE decodes the signal and makes its output signal FADES high.
  • the logic circuit OCC other than the RAM address decoder RADE and the flash address decoder FADE serves as means for overlapping the addresses of the predetermined address area of the flash memory FMRY (a part of the small memory block SMB) with addresses of the specified address area of the random access memory RAM, as described above.
  • the RAMS and RAM 2 to RAM 0 correspond to those of the RAM control register RAMCR described above with reference to FIG. 64.
  • flash memory select signal MS-FLN* is brought into a high level non-active state and RAM selection signal MS-RAMN* is brought into a low level active state so that the address signal for otherwise accessing the small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY now serves to access the specified address area SRA of the random access memory RAM without accessing the small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY.
  • the flash memory selection signal MS-FLN* is brought into a low level active state so that data is read into the CPU from an address area of the flash memory FMRY specified by the address signal on the address bus lines, while when the address signal on the address bus lines indicates the random access memory RAM, the RAM selection signal MS-RAMN* is brought into a low level active state so that an address area of the random access memory RAM specified by the address signal on the address bus lines is accessed by the CPU for data reading therefrom or data writing thereinto.
  • FIG. 10 shows an example of a technique of making partial rewrite of a memory block of the flash memory efficient.
  • FIGS. 11A and 11B show the principle of the flash memory.
  • a memory cell exemplified in FIG. 11A is constructed of an insulated gate field effect transistor having a two-layer gate structure.
  • 1 designates a P type silicon substrate, 14 a P type semiconductor region formed in the silicon substrate 1 , 13 an N type semiconductor region and 15 and N type semiconductor region of low concentration.
  • Denoted by 8 is a floating gate formed over the P type silicon substrate 1 through a thin oxide film 7 (for example, having a thickness of 10 nm) serving as a tunnel insulating film and by 11 is a control gate formed over the floating gate 8 through an oxide film 9 .
  • a source is formed of 13 and 15 and a drain is formed of 13 and 14 .
  • Information stored in this memory cell is substantially held as a change in threshold voltage in the transistor. Described hereinafter is the case where a transistor used in the memory cell to store information (hereinafter referred to as a memory transistor) is of N channel type, except otherwise described.
  • a write operation of information to the memory cell can be realized by, applying high voltages to, for example, the control gate 11 and drain so that electrons may be injected from the drain side to the floating gate 8 through avalanche injection.
  • the memory transistor assumes a threshold voltage as viewed from its control gate 7 which is raised as shown in FIG. 11B in comparison with that of the memory transistor without subjected to a write operation and so placed in the erase condition.
  • an erase operation can be realized by applying a high voltage to, for example, the source so that electrons may be drawn out of the floating gate 8 to the source side through tunnel phenomenon.
  • the memory transistor assumes a threshold voltage as viewed from its control gate 11 which is lowered as shown in FIG. 11B.
  • the threshold of the memory transistor shown in FIG. 11B is set to a positive voltage level in both of the write condition and erase condition.
  • the threshold voltage for write condition is set to be higher and the threshold voltage for erase condition is set to be lower.
  • a memory cell can be constructed of a single transistor without employing a selection transistor.
  • erase of the stored information can be done by drawing electrons stored in the floating gate 8 to the source electrode and therefore, by keeping the erase operation continuing for a relatively long time, electrons which are larger in amount than electrons injected in the floating gate 8 upon a write operation are drawn out.
  • the threshold voltage of the memory transistor assumes, for example, a negative level and there occurs such inconvenience that a word line is selected even when the word line is at an unselection level.
  • Write can also be effected by utilizing tunnel current as in the case of erase.
  • voltages applied to the drain and control gate 11 are limited to relatively low values. For example, a low voltage of about 1V is applied to the drain and a low voltage of about 5V is applied to the control gate 11 . Under the application of these voltages, the magnitude of a channel current flowing through the memory transistor is detected so as to decide whether information stored in the memory cell is “0” or “1”.
  • FIG. 12 shows the principle of construction of a memory cell array using the memory transistors.
  • four memory transistors (memory cells) Q 1 to Q 4 are typically depicted.
  • control gates (gates for selection of memory cells) of memory transistors Q 1 and Q 2 (Q 3 and Q 4 ) arranged on the same row are connected to a corresponding word line WL 1 (WL 2 ), and drain regions (input/output nodes of memory cells) of memory transistors Q 1 and Q 3 (Q 2 and Q 4 ) are connected to a corresponding data line DL 1 (DL 2 ).
  • Source regions of the memory transistors Q 1 and Q 3 (Q 2 and Q 4 ) are coupled to a source line SL 1 (SL 2 ).
  • Table 1 shows an example of voltage conditions for erase operation and write operations of memory cells. TABLE 1 selection/ memory element unselection source drain gate Writing Q1 selection 0 V 6 V 12 V Q2 unselection 0 V 0 V 12 V Q3 unselection 0 V 6 V 0 V Q4 unselection 0 V 0 V 0 V Erasing (positive voltage scheme) Q1, Q3 selection 12 V 0 V 0 V Q2, Q4 unselection 0 V 0 V 0 V Erasing (negative voltage scheme) Q1, Q2 selection 5 V 0 V ⁇ 10 V Q3, Q4 unselection 5 V 0 V 0 V
  • memory elements mean memory cells and gates mean control gates serving as selection gates of the memory cells.
  • a negative voltage of, for example, ⁇ 10 V is applied to the control gate to form a high electric field necessary for erase.
  • memory cells at least sources of which are connected in common can be erased collectively. Accordingly, with the source lines SL 1 and SL 2 connected together in the construction of FIG. 12, the four memory cells Q 1 to Q 4 can be erased simultaneously. In this case, by changing the number of memory bits connected to the same source line, the size of memory block can be set desirably.
  • the source line division scheme in addition to a typical instance shown in FIG. 12 where the data line is defined as a unit (a common source line is so laid as to extend in the data line direction), there is available an instance where the word line is defined as a unit (a common source line is so laid as to extend in the word line direction).
  • the word line is defined as a unit (a common source line is so laid as to extend in the word line direction).
  • erase based on the negative voltage scheme memory cells having control gates connected in common can be erased simultaneously.
  • FIG. 13 is a circuit block diagram showing an example of a flash memory in which storage capacities of simultaneously erasable memory blocks are made to be different.
  • the flash memory FMRY shown in the figure has data input/output terminals D 0 to D 7 of 8 bits, so that memory array portions ARY 0 to ARY 7 are provided in association with the respective data input/output terminals.
  • Each of the memory array portions ARY 0 to ARY 7 is divided into two of a memory block LMB having a relatively large storage capacity and a memory block SMB having a relatively small storage capacity.
  • details of the memory array portion ARY 0 are typically illustrated and the other memory array portions ARY 1 to ARY 7 are constructed similarly.
  • memory cells MC formed of insulated gate field effect transistors of two-layer gate structure as explained previously in connection with FIG. 11 are arranged in matrix.
  • WL 0 to WLn designate word lines which are common to all of the memory array portions ARY 0 to ARY 7 .
  • Control gates of memory cells arranged on the same row are connected to a corresponding word line.
  • drain regions of memory cells MC arranged on the same column are connected to a corresponding data line DL 0 , . . . or DL 7 .
  • Source regions of memory cells MC constituting the memory block SMB are connected in common to a source line SL 1 and source regions of memory cells MC constituting the memory block LMB are connected in common to a source line SL 2 .
  • a high voltage Vpp used for erase is supplied from voltage output circuits VOUT 1 and VOUT 2 to the source lines SL 1 and SL 2 .
  • An output operation of the voltage output circuits VOUT 1 and VOUT 2 is selected in accordance with values of bits B 1 and B 2 of an erase block designation register. For example, by setting “1” to the bit B 1 of the erase block designation register, only the memory block SMB of each of the memory array portions ARY 0 to ARY 7 is allowed to be erased simultaneously. When “1” is set to the bit B 2 of the erase block designation register, only the memory block LMB of each of the memory array portions ARY 0 to ARY 7 is allowed to be erased simultaneously. When “1” is set to both the bits B 1 and B 2 , the whole of the flash memory is allowed to be erased simultaneously.
  • Selection of the word line WL 0 , . . . or WLn is effected by causing a row address decoder XADEC to decode a row address signal AX fetched in through a row address buffer XABUFF and a row address latch XALAT.
  • a word driver WDRV selects a word line on the basis of a selection signal delivered out of the row address decoder XADEC.
  • the word driver WDRV is operated with a power supply as represented by voltage Vcc such as 5 V and earth potential such as 0 V fed from a voltage selection circuit VSEL, and it drives a word line to be selected to a selection level by the voltage Vcc and maintains a word line not to be selected at an unselection level such as earth potential.
  • the word driver WDRV is operated with a power supply as represented by voltage Vpp such as 12 V and earth potential such as 0 V fed from the voltage selection circuit VSEL and it drives a word line to be selected to a write high voltage level such as 12 V.
  • the output of the word driver WDRV is rendered to be a low voltage level such as 0 V.
  • each of the memory array portions ARY 0 to ARY 7 the data lines DL 0 to DL 7 are connected in common to a common data line CD through column selection switches YS 0 to YS 7 .
  • Switching control of the column selection switches YS 0 to YS 7 is carried out by causing a column address decoder YADEC to decode a column address signal AY fetched in through a column address buffer YABUFF and a column address latch YALAT.
  • An output selection signal of the column address decoder YADEC is fed in common to all of the memory array portions ARY 0 to ARY 7 . Accordingly, when any one of the output selection signals of the column address decoder YADEC is rendered to be a selection level, a single data line is brought into connection to the common data line CD in each of the memory array portions ARY 0 to ARY 7 .
  • Data read from a memory cell MC to the common data line is applied to a sense amplifier SAMP through a selection switch RS and the amplified data is delivered to the outside through a data output latch DOLAT and a data output buffer DOBUFF.
  • the selection switch RS is set to a selection level in synchronism with a read operation.
  • Write data fed from the outside is held in a data input latch circuit DILAT through a data input buffer DIBUFF.
  • a write circuit WRIT supplies a write high voltage to the common data line CD through a selection switch WS.
  • This write high voltage is fed to the drain of a memory cell, whose control gate is applied with the high voltage under the direction of a row address signal AX, through a data line selected by a column address signal AY, so that write into the memory cell in question is carried out.
  • the selection switch WS is set to a selection level in synchronism with a write operation.
  • Various timings for write and erase and voltage selection control signals are generated by a write/erase control circuit WECONT.
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of further details of a microcomputer corresponding to the microcomputer of FIG. 1.
  • the microcomputer MCU shown in the figure comprises as the same function blocks as those shown in FIG. 1 a central processing unit CPU, a flash memory FMRY, a serial communication interface SCI, a control circuit CONT and a random access memory RAM.
  • the microcomputer comprises a 16-bit integrated timer pulse unit IPU and a watchdog timer WDTMR.
  • the microcomputer comprises ports PORT 1 to PORT 12 .
  • a clock oscillator CPG an interruption controller IRCONT, an analog/digital converter ADC and a wait state controller WSCONT.
  • the central processing unit CPU, flash memory FMRY, random access memory RAM and 16-bit integrated timer pulse unit IPU are coupled to an address bus ABUS, a lower data bus LDBUS (for example, 8 bits) and an upper data bus HDBUS (for example, 8 bits).
  • the serial communication interface SCI, watchdog timer WDTMR, interruption controller IRCONT, analog/digital converter ADC, wait state controller WSCONT, chip select controller CSCONT and ports PORT 1 to PORT 12 are coupled to the address bus ABUS and higher data bus HDBUS.
  • the chip select controller CSCONT serves as means for decoding higher bits (for example, bits 15 to 7 ) of the address bus (ABUS) to generate a selection signal indicating which address area the address signal on the address bus (ABUS) designates for selection.
  • the chip select controller CSCONT may include a plurality of address area designation registers which are set for designating address areas of the built-in random access memory RAM, address areas of the built-in flash memory, address areas of I/O devices such as a memory and/or a floppy disk controller externally connected to the microcomputer MCU.
  • the chip select controller CSCONT decodes the address signal on the address bus to determine whether the address signal is for an access to a low speed memory or an I/O device externally connected to the microcomputer MCU. If so determined, the chip select controller CSCONT informs the wait state controller WSCONT thereof. As a result, the wait state controller WSCONT inserts one or more wait states in the bus cycle of the microcomputer.
  • Such chip select controller as described above is disclosed, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,070,473 issued on Dec. 3, 1991 and assigned to Hitachi Microcomputer Engineering Ltd. and Hitachi, Ltd., the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
  • Vpp designates a high voltage for rewrite of the flash memory.
  • EXTAL and XTAL represent signals supplied from a not-shown vibrator, provided externally of the chip of the microcomputer, to the clock oscillator CPG.
  • is a synchronizing clock signal delivered from the clock oscillator CPG to the outside.
  • MD 0 to MD 2 designate mode signals supplied to the control circuit CONT in order to set the first operation mode or the second operation mode upon rewrite of the flash memory FMRY and correspond to the mode signal MODE in FIG. 1.
  • RES* is a reset signal and by STBY* is a standby signal, these signals being supplied to the central processing unit CPU and other circuit blocks.
  • NMI designates a non-maskable interrupt signal for applying a non-maskable interruption to the interruption controller ICONT.
  • Other interruption signals are applied to the interruption controller ICONT through the ports PORT 8 and PORT 9 .
  • AS* is an address strobe signal indicative of validity of an address signal delivered to the outside
  • RD* is a read signal for informing the outside of a read cycle
  • HWR* is an upper byte write signal for informing the outside of a write cycle of upper 8 bits
  • LWR* is a lower byte write signal for informing the outside of a write cycle of lower 8 bits, these signals being access control signals for the outside of the microcomputer MCU.
  • the ports PORT 1 and PORT 2 are allotted, though not limitedly, for input/output of data BD 0 to BD 15 used for the microcomputer MCU to access the outside in the other mode than the second operation mode in which the external PROM writer performs direct rewrite control of the flash memory FMRY.
  • the ports PORT 3 to PORT 5 are allotted, though not limitedly, for address signals BA 0 to BA 19 .
  • the ports PORT 2 to PORT 5 and PORT 8 are allotted, though not limitedly, for connection to the PROM writer adapted to control write of the flash memory FMRY. More specifically, the port PORT 2 is allotted for input/output of data ED 0 to ED 7 for write and verify and the ports PORT 3 to PORT 5 and PORT 8 are allotted for input of address signals EA 0 to EA 16 as well as input of access control signal CE* (chip enable signal), OE* (output enable signal) and WE* (write enable signal).
  • CE* chip enable signal
  • OE* output enable signal
  • WE* write enable signal
  • the chip enable signal CE* is an operation selection signal for the flash memory FMRY delivered from the PROM writer
  • the output enable signal OE* is a designation signal of an output operation for the flash memory FMRY
  • the write enable signal WE* is a designation signal of a write operation for the flash memory FMRY.
  • the allotment of the external terminals at that time can be done in the form of such a terminal arrangement that the microcomputer MCU can be connected with ease to the PROM writer PRW through the conversion socket SOCKET.
  • the external terminals allotted for connection to the PROM writer PRW in the second operation mode are assigned with other functions in the other operation mode of the microcomputer MCU.
  • FIG. 15 shows a top view of a flat package of the FIG. 14 microcomputer MCU which is, for example, sealed with resin and designed to have external terminals in four directions. Signals shown in FIG. 15 are identical to those shown in FIG. 14. External terminals (pins) not assigned with signal names may be utilized as an input pin of a wait signal, an input pin of a bus request signal, an output pin of a bus acknowledge signal and input/output pins for signals between such a peripheral circuit as serial communication interface SCI and the outside.
  • the distance PP between adjacent terminals (pins) led from the package FP may be 0.5 mm or less.
  • a user of the microcomputer MCU connects the flash memory FMRY included in the microcomputer MCU to the PROM writer PRW through the conversion socket SOCKET so as to write data into the flash memory FMRY.
  • the distance between adjacent terminals (pin pitch) PP of the package FP is set to be 0.5 mm or less, pin bends due to unwanted contact between external terminals of the conversion socket SOCKET and those of the package FP tend to occur when the package FP is inserted into the conversion socket SOCKET.
  • the central processing unit CPU is allowed to write data into the flash memory FMRY and therefore, after the package of the microcomputer MCU is mounted on a mounting board (printed board), the user can write data in the flash memory FMRY by means of the central processing unit CPU without using the external PROM writer PRW for write of data into the flash memory FMRY, whereby even when the microcomputer MCU is sealed in the package having the pin pitch which is 0.5 mm or less, the user can be relieved from committing lead bends of external terminals led from the package.
  • FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the whole of the flash memory FRMY incorporated in the microcomputer MCU of FIG. 14.
  • ARY designates a memory array in which memory cells formed of insulated gate field effect transistors of two-layer gate structure explained in connection with FIGS. 11A and 11B are arranged in matrix.
  • control gates of memory cells are connected to a corresponding word line
  • drain regions of memory cells are connected to a corresponding data line
  • source regions of memory cells are connected to a source line common to each memory block, but the array is divided into memory blocks in a different manner from FIG. 13. For example, as shown in FIG.
  • the array is divided into seven large memory blocks (large blocks) LMB 0 to LMB 6 each having a relatively large storage capacity and eight small memory blocks (small blocks) SMB 0 to SMB 7 each having a relatively small storage capacity.
  • the large memory block is utilized as, for example, a program storing area or a large capacity data storing area.
  • the small memory block is utilized as, for example, a small capacity data storing area.
  • ALAT designates a latch circuit for address signals PAB 0 to PAB 15 .
  • the address signals PAB 0 to PAB 15 correspond to output address signals BA 0 to BA 15 of the central processing unit CPU.
  • the address signals PAB 0 to PAB 15 correspond to output address signals EA 0 to EA 15 of the PROM writer PRW.
  • XADEC designates a row address decoder for decoding a row address signal fetched in through the address latch ALAT.
  • WDRV designates a word driver for driving a word line on the basis of a selection signal delivered out of the row address decoder XADEC.
  • the word driver WDRV drives the word line with a voltage of 5 V and in a data write operation, drives the word line with a high voltage of 12 V. In a data erase operation, all outputs of the word driver WDRV are rendered to be a low voltage level of 0V.
  • YADEC designates a column address decoder for decoding a column address signal fetched in through the address latch YALAT.
  • YSEL designates a column selection circuit for selecting a data line in accordance with an output selection signal of the column address decoder YADEC.
  • SAMP designates a sense amplifier for amplifying a read signal from a data line selected by the column selection circuit YSEL in a data read operation.
  • DOLAT designates a data output latch for holding an output of the sense amplifier.
  • DOBUFF designates a data output buffer for delivering data held in the data output latch DOLAT to the outside.
  • PDB 0 to PDB 7 are data of lower 8 bits (one byte) and PDB 8 to PDB 15 are data of upper 8 bits.
  • the output data is of two bytes at maximum.
  • DIBUFF designates a data input buffer for fetching write data fed from the outside. The data fetched in by the data input buffer DIBUFF is held in a data input latch circuit DILAT.
  • a write circuit WRIT supplies a write high voltage to a data line selected by the column selection circuit YSEL.
  • This write high voltage is supplied to the drain of a memory cell whose control gate is applied with a high voltage in accordance with a row address signal, so that the memory cell in question undergoes write.
  • ERASEC designates an erase circuit for supplying an erase high voltage to a source line of a designated memory block to erase the memory block simultaneously.
  • FCONT designates a control circuit for performing timing control of a data read operation and selection control of various timings and voltages for write and erase.
  • This control circuit FCONT comprises a control register CREG including the erase block designation register MBREG and the program/erase control register PEREG.
  • FIG. 18 shows an example of the control register CREG.
  • the control register CREG includes a program/erase control register PEREG of 8 bits and erase block designation registers MBREG 1 and MBREGG 2 each being of 8 bits.
  • Vpp represents a high voltage applying flag which is rendered to be “1” in accordance with the application of a rewrite high voltage.
  • An E bit is a bit for designating an erase operation and an EV bit is a bit for designating a verify operation for erasure.
  • a P bit is a bit for designating a write operation (program operation) and a PV bit is a bit for designating a verify operation for writing.
  • the erase block designation register MBREG 1 is a register for designating any one of memory blocks contained in the seven divisions of large block and the erase block designation register MBREG 2 is a register for designating any one of memory blocks contained in the eight divisions of small block, each of these registers having 0-th bit to seventh bit which are bits for designating individual memory blocks whereby, for example, bit “1” signifies selection of a corresponding memory block and bit “0” signifies unselection of a corresponding memory block. For example, when the seventh bit of the erase block designation register is “1”, the small memory block SMB 7 is designated.
  • the control register CREG is readable/writable from the outside.
  • the control circuit FCONT makes reference to the contents set in the control register CREG to control erase and write in accordance with the contents.
  • the operation state of erase and write can be controlled by the CPU or externally by rewriting the contents of the control register CREG.
  • control circuit FCONT is supplied with control signals of FLM, MS-FLM, MS-MISN, M2RDN, M2WRN, MRDN, MWRN, IOWOTDN and RST and is also supplied with data of PDB 8 to PDB 15 of upper one byte and predetermined bits of address signals PAB 0 to PAB 15 .
  • the control signal FLM is a signal for designating an operation mode of the flash memory FMRY whereby its “0” designates the first operation mode and its “1” designates the second operation mode.
  • This signal FLM is formed on the basis of, for example, the mode signals MD 0 to MD 2 .
  • the control signal MS-FLN is a selection signal of the flash memory FMRY whereby its “0” designates selection and its “1” designates unselection.
  • the central processing unit CPU delivers the control signal MS-FLN and in the second operation mode, the control signal MS-FLM corresponds to a chip enable signal CE* supplied from the PROM writer PRW.
  • the control signal MS-MISN is a selection signal of the control register CREG. In this case, selection of which one of the program/erase control register PEREG, erase block designation register MBREG 1 and erase block register MBREG 2 is determined by consulting predetermined bits of the address signals PAB 0 to PAB 15 .
  • the central processing unit CPU delivers the control signal MS-MISN.
  • the most significant address bit EA 16 delivered out of the PROM writer PRM is deemed as the control signal MS-MISN, though not limitedly.
  • the M2RDN is a memory read strobe signal
  • the M2WRN is a memory write strobe signal
  • the MRDN is a read signal of the control register CREG
  • the MWRN is a write signal of the control register CREG.
  • the central processing unit CPU delivers these control signals.
  • a write enable signal WE* supplied from the PROM writer PRW is deemed as the M2WRN and MWRN and an output enable signal OE* supplied from the PROM writer is deemed as the M2RDN and MRDN.
  • the memory write strobe signal M2WRN is deemed as a strobe signal for writing data to be written in a memory cell into the data input latch circuit DILAT. Practically, write into the memory cell is started by setting a P bit of the control register CREG.
  • IOWORDN is a signal for switching access to the flash memory FMRY between 8-bit read access and 16-bit read access. In the second operation mode, this control signal IOWORDN is fixed to a logical value for designating the 8-bit read access.
  • RST is a reset signal for the flash memory FMRY.
  • the flash memory FMRY is reset by this signal RST or when the Vpp flag of program/erase control register PEREG is rendered to be “0”, the mode setting bits EV, PV, E and P in the program/erase control register PEREG are cleared.
  • FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing an example of a memory read operation in the flash memory FMRY.
  • CK 1 M and CK 2 M are non-overlap 2-phase clock signals which are deemed as operation reference clock signals.
  • Denoted by tCYC is cycle time which differs only slightly from access time for the RAM.
  • a read operation of the control register CREG is carried out at similar timings.
  • FIG. 20 is a timing chart showing an example of a memory write operation in the flash memory FMRY.
  • a memory write operation designated by a write strobe signal M2WRN shown in the figure actual write of a memory cell is not carried out as described previously but input address signals PAB 0 to PAB 15 are held in the address latch circuit ALAT and input data of PB 8 to PB 15 is held in the data input latch DILAT, thus completing a write cycle of interest.
  • a write operation of the control register CREG is conducted at similar timings but in this case, actual data write into the control register CREG is carried out.
  • a rewrite control program to be executed by the central processing unit CPU includes a program for erase and a program for write.
  • the rewrite control program can be programmed such that an erase process routine is initially executed and a write process routine is automatically executed without interruption in accordance with designation of the first operation mode. Alternatively, erase and write may be separated and then the first operation mode may be designated thereto separately. Rewrite control by the PROM writer can be executed through a similar operation to that of the first operation mode.
  • FIG. 21 shows an example of details of the write control procedure.
  • the procedure shown in the figure is the procedure for write of data of, for example, one byte and is common to both of the control by the central processing unit CPU in the first operation mode and the control by the PROM writer in the second operation mode.
  • the following description will be given by way of a control master which is represented by the central processing unit CPU.
  • the central processing unit CPU sets one to a counter n built therein (step S 1 ). Subsequently, the central processing unit CPU performs the memory write operation explained in connection with FIG. 20 to set data to be written in the flash memory FMRY to the data input latch circuit DILAT shown in FIG. 16 and set an address to be written with the data to the address latch circuit ALAT (step S 2 ). Then, the central processing unit CPU issues a write cycle to the control register CREG to set a program bit P (step 3 ).
  • control circuit FCONT applies, on the basis of the data and address set in the step 2 , high voltages to the control gate and the drain of a memory cell designated by the address to perform write.
  • the central processing unit CPU waits for, for example, 10 ⁇ sec. to clear the write process time on the flash memory side (step S 4 ) and then clears the program bit P (step S 5 ).
  • the central processing unit CPU issues a write cycle to the control register CREG and sets a program verify bit PV (step 6 ).
  • the control circuit CONT utilizes the address set by the step 2 to apply a verify voltage to a word line to be selected by that address and to read data from the memory cell subjected to write.
  • the verify level voltage is set to a voltage level of, for example, 7 V which is higher than the power supply voltage Vcc such as 5 V.
  • the central processing unit CPU checks coincidence of read-out data with data utilized for write (step S 7 ). If the central processing unit CPU confirms coincidence through verify, it clears the program verify bit PV (step S 8 ), thus completing write of the one-byte data.
  • step S 10 the central processing unit CPU confirms non-coincidence through verify by step S 7 , it clears the program verify bit PV in step S 9 and thereafter decides whether the value of counter n reaches a write retry upper-limit frequency N (step S 10 ). Thus, if the write retry upper-limit frequency N is reached, defective write is determined and the processing ends. If the write retry upper-limit frequency N is not reached, the central processing unit CPU increments the value of counter n by one (step S 11 ) and repeats the processing beginning with the step S 3 .
  • FIG. 22 shows an example of details of the erase control procedure.
  • the procedure shown in the figure is common to both of the control by the central processing unit CPU in the first operation mode and the control by the PROM writer in the second operation mode.
  • the following description will be given by way of a control master which is represented by the central processing unit CPU.
  • the central processing unit CPU sets one to its built-in counter n (step S 21 ). Subsequently, the central processing unit CPU performs pre-write of memory cells within an area to be erased (step S 22 ). Namely, data “0” is written in a memory cell at an address to be erased.
  • the control procedure for pre-write may make use of the write control procedure explained with reference to FIG. 21. This pre-write processing is carried out in order to uniform, over all bits, electric charge amounts present in the floating gates before erasing, thus making the erase state uniform.
  • the central processing unit CPU issues a write cycle to the control register CREG to designate a memory block to be erased simultaneously (step S 23 ). More particularly, a memory block number to be erased is designated to the erase block designation registers MBREG 1 and MBREG 2 . After the designation of the memory block to be erased, the central processing unit CPU issues a write cycle to the control register CREG to set an erase bit E (step 24 ). Through this, the control circuit ECONT applies a high voltage to a source line of the memory block designated by the step 23 to erase the memory block of interest simultaneously. The central processing unit CPU waits for, for example, 10 msec. to clear the batch erasing process time on the flash memory side (step S 25 ). A time duration of 10 msec. is shorter than the time for completing one erase operation. Then, the erase bit E is cleared (step S 26 ).
  • the central processing unit CPU first sets internally a head address of the memory block to be erased simultaneously as an address to be verified (step S 27 ) and then performs dummy write to the verify address (step S 28 ). Namely, a memory write cycle is issued to the address to be verified. Through this, the memory address to be verified is held in the address latch circuit ALAT. Subsequently, the central processing unit CPU issues a write cycle to the control register CREG and sets an erase verify bit EV (step 29 ). Through this, the control circuit FCONT utilizes the address set by the step 28 to apply an erase verify voltage to the word line to be selected by the address and to read data of the erased memory cell.
  • the erase verify voltage is set to a voltage level of, for example, 3.5 V which is lower than the power supply voltage Vcc such as 5 V.
  • the central processing unit CPU verifies coincidence of read-out data with data under the erase completion state (step S 30 ). If the central processing unit CPU confirms coincidence through verify, it clears the erase verify bit EV (step S 31 ) and then decides whether the present verify address is a final address of the erased memory block (step S 32 ), thus completing a series of erase operations if the final address is identified. If the final address is not reached, the central processing unit CPU increments the verify address by one (step S 33 ) and repeats the processing beginning with the step S 29 .
  • step S 35 the central processing unit CPU increments the value of counter n by one (step S 36 ) and repeats the processing beginning with step S 24 .
  • step S 36 the central processing unit CPU increments the value of counter n by one (step S 36 ) and repeats the processing beginning with step S 24 .
  • FIG. 24 shows a memory mat configuration of a flash memory in which a plurality of memory blocks are defined each in a unit of word line and the simultaneously erasable memory blocks have different storage capacities.
  • memory blocks are defined each in a unit of data line, memory blocks are defined in a unit of word line in FIG. 24.
  • a memory block LMB having a relatively large storage capacity and a memory block SMB having a relatively small storage capacity are illustrated as representatives throughout memory array portions ARY 0 to ARY 7 .
  • memory cells MC formed of insulated gate field effect transistors of two-layer gate structure as explained previously in connection with FIG. 11 are arranged in matrix.
  • WL 0 to WLn designate word lines which are common to all of the memory array portions ARY 0 to ARY 7 .
  • Control gates of memory cells arranged on the same row are connected to a corresponding word line.
  • drain regions of memory cells MC arranged on the same column are connected to a corresponding data line DL 0 , . . . or DLm.
  • Source regions of memory cells MC constituting the small memory block SMB are connected in common to a source line SLwi extending in the word line direction and source regions of memory cells MC constituting the large memory block LMB are connected in common to a source line SLw 1 extending in the word line direction.
  • a memory block to be erased simultaneously is designated by the erase block designation register, so that high voltage Vpp for erase is supplied to a source line of the designated memory block. Details of the voltage conditions for erase and write will be described later.
  • YSEL designates a Y selection circuit, CD a common data line, WRIT a write circuit, DILAT a data input latch, SAMP a sense amplifier, DOLAT a data output latch, DIBUFF a data input buffer and DOBUFF a data output buffer.
  • the relation between memory array portions ARY 0 to ARY 7 and output data resembles that in FIG. 13. More particularly, one bit of input/output data corresponds to one memory mat. For example, data D 0 is under the charge of the memory array portion ARY 0 .
  • the common data line CD can be sectioned, one for each memory array portion, and need not extend over a long distance throughout all of the memory array portions, as illustrated in FIGS. 25A and 25B.
  • the length of the common data line CD is much smaller than that of the common data line CD′. Accordingly, parasitic capacitance (Cst) associated with the common data line CD can be reduced (Cst ⁇ C′st) to contribute to speed-up of access and a low voltage operation.
  • a minimum memory block in the whole of memory array ARY having a parallel input/output bit number equal to one byte has a storage capacity corresponding to that of one word line, that is, the storage capacity corresponding to the number of memory cells associated with one word line over the entire memory array. This holds regardless of the number of parallel input/output bits.
  • a minimum memory block in the whole of memory array has a storage capacity complying with the number of parallel input/output bits to amount up to a storage capacity of 8 data lines (one data line is associated with each memory mat).
  • the number of memory bits in the direction of data line is 1 ⁇ 8 of the number of memory bits in the direction of word line, no difference takes place between memory blocks defined in a unit of data line and memory blocks defined in a unit of word line.
  • the number of memory bits in the direction of data line is conditioned by the efficiency of layout of semiconductor integrated circuit formation or the efficiency of addressing memory cells, amounting up to about 1 ⁇ 2 of the number of memory bits in the direction of word line and in addition, due to the fact that the flash memory built in the microcomputer is connected to internal data bus, the number of parallel input/output bits is defined in a unit of byte or word.
  • the storage capacity of the minimum memory block can be reduced drastically in the case where memory blocks are defined each in a unit of word line.
  • the minimum size of memory block reduced, convenience of use of a memory block as a data area can be improved further and besides the effect of preventing such wastefulness that information is erased simultaneously together with information which need not substantially be rewritten and then the latter information is again written can fulfill itself.
  • FIGS. 26A and 26B show an example of the voltage conditions for erase/write available when memory blocks are defined each in a unit of word line. Especially, countermeasures against data line disturbance are applied to an unselected block (unselected memory block) for writing.
  • a selected block (selected memory block) 20 is a memory block selected for simultaneous erasing and an unselected block 21 is a memory block not selected for simultaneous erasing.
  • word lines WLh to WLk depicted as representatives are applied with ground potential GND such as 0 V.
  • GND ground potential
  • its common source line SLwm is applied with a high voltage Vpp of, for example, 12 V so that memory cells of the selected block 20 may be erased simultaneously.
  • Vpp high voltage
  • the unselected block 21 its common source line SLwn is maintained at ground potential GND to inhibit erase.
  • a selected block 30 is a memory block containing memory cells selected for writing and an unselected block 31 is a memory block not containing memory cells to be written.
  • a common source line SLwm is applied with ground potential GND and when, for example, a memory cell MC circled by phantom line is to be written, high voltage Vpp is applied to a word line WLh connected with its control gate and a relatively high voltage Vp of, for example, 6 V is applied to its data line.
  • a word line WLi not selected is applied with ground potential GND.
  • a memory cell (surrounded by a quadrangle of phantom line) in the unselected block 31 and connected to a data line DLk associated with the former memory cell is applied with voltage Vp.
  • a common source line SLwn in the unselected block 31 is applied with a voltage Vddi (data line disturbance prevention voltage) of, for example, 3.5 V to apply countermeasures against data line disturbance. If the source line SLwn is applied with ground potential GND as in the case of the selected block 30 , then data line disturbance will occur.
  • Vddi data line disturbance prevention voltage
  • memory cells which are connected to data line DLk and are not to be written are applied with ground potential GND at their associated word lines and source lines to set up the same condition as that responsible for occurrence of data line disturbance but such condition can be substantially negligible. This will become apparent from item [15] of “Correlation of data line disturbance time between memory blocks” to be described later with reference to FIG. 29.
  • FIG. 27A shows the mechanism of generation of data line disturbance. More particularly, in a region (1) near the source side end of drain, electron and hole pairs are generated through a tunnel phenomenon between bands. At that time, if the source is maintained at ground potential GND and the drain is maintained at a relatively high voltage Vp to generate a relatively large electric field, holes of the electron and hole pairs are accelerated by an electric field in a depletion layer of the region (2) and turn into hot holes. The hot holes pass through a thin tunnel insulating film of about 10 nm thickness (under floating gate electrode 8 ) so as to be injected into the floating gate 8 .
  • This state is a data line disturbance state and when a memory cell transistor suffers from the data line disturbance for a long time, its threshold is decreased, with the result that the memory cell being in write state “0” changes to erase state “1” and the memory cell being in erase state “1” undergoes depletion to cause an unwanted change of stored information or an eventual erroneous operation (data line disturbance fault).
  • FIG. 27B shows the mechanism of countermeasurements against data line disturbance.
  • FIG. 28 shows an example of experiment concerning the change of threshold of a memory cell with respect to data line disturbance time.
  • a memory cell transistor as shown in the figure is used and write is repeated to obtain threshold voltages by maintaining the source potential Vs at 0 V, floating (open) and 3.5 V, respectively, under the condition that ground potential GND is applied to the control gate and substrate of the memory cell transistor and 6.5 V is applied to the drain thereof.
  • the upper portion of the figure is for the memory cell transistor being in the write state “0” and the lower portion is for the memory cell transistor being in the erase state “1”.
  • the source potential of the unselected memory block needs to be biased with a data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi such as 3.5 V not higher than the drain voltage and the data line disturbance time needs to be reduced to as small a value as possible.
  • the data line disturbance time affecting a memory cell MCa of the memory block MBa is 1.5 msec when the memory block MBa of interest is selected for writing (Phase A/A) and 1000 sec. when the memory block MBb is selected (Phase A/B).
  • this difference is due to a difference in storage capacity (the number of word lines) between the memory blocks MBa and MBb.
  • the above difference is attributable to the fact that in calculation of the data line disturbance time affecting the memory cell MCa in the memory block MBa selected for rewriting the number of times of substantial rewrite is deemed as one. More specifically, the difference is due to the fact while the number of times of rewrite is deemed as one in the calculation equation of data line disturbance time shown in Phase A/A which is 100 ⁇ s ⁇ 15 ⁇ one time, the number of times of rewrite is 10000 which coincides with the number of times of actual rewrite operations in the calculation equation of the data line disturbance time shown in Phase A/B which is 100 ⁇ s ⁇ 1008 ⁇ 10000 times.
  • the memory cell MCa in the memory block MBa selected for rewriting threshold voltages of all memory cells are raised through pre-write preceding simultaneously erasing and thereafter erase is carried out stepwise from the viewpoint of prevention of excessive erase upon each rewrite operation as explained with reference to FIG. 22, so that the data line disturbance time of the memory cell MCa of interest is substantially defined by the time for one rewrite operation.
  • the data line disturbance state affecting the memory cell MCa in the memory block MBa selected for rewriting is deemed as being initialized every rewrite operation.
  • the memory cell MCa does not undergo the initialization and the data line disturbance time is accumulated in accordance with the frequency of actual rewrite operations.
  • the data line disturbance time affecting the memory cell MCb of the memory block MBb is 0.1 sec. when the memory block MBb of interest is selected as write object (Phase B/B) and is 16 sec. when the memory block MBa is selected (Phase B/A).
  • this difference is also due to the fact that the storage capacity (the number of word lines) differs between the memory blocks and the substantial frequency of rewrite operations is deemed as one in the calculation of the data line disturbance time affecting the memory cell MCb in the memory block MBb selected for rewriting.
  • the data line disturbance time to which the unselected memory block is subjected owing to write of the selected memory block is far longer than the data line disturbance time affecting the memory cell in the selected memory block. Accordingly, it will be appreciated that in order to prevent a decrease in threshold voltage of a memory cell due to data line disturbance, the common source line on the unselected memory block side for writing is at least required to be biased by voltage Vddi but the data line disturbance time affecting the memory cell in the selected memory block can be neglected without causing almost any troubles.
  • the data line disturbance time (e.g., 1000 sec) affecting an unselected memory block having a small storage capacity owing to write of a memory block having a large capacity is relatively larger than the data line disturbance time (e.g., 1.6 sec) in the converse case.
  • FIGS. 30A and 30B show an embodiment of a memory array in which a transfer gate circuit for selectively separating data lines is interposed between memory blocks.
  • a transfer gate circuit TGC is arranged between memory blocks MBa and MBb and has transfer MOS transistors T 0 to Tk associated with data lines DL 0 to DLk in one to one correspondence relationship, the transfer MOS transistors being controlled for switching by a control signal DT.
  • a Y selection circuit YSEL such as a column selection switch circuit is arranged on the side of the memory block MBb.
  • FIG. 30B shows switch control modes of the transfer MOS transistors T 0 to Tk.
  • the transfer MOS transistors T 0 to Tk are rendered on. At that time, source potential Vsa of the memory block MBb serving as the selected block for writing is maintained at ground potential GND and source potential Vsb of the memory block MBb standing for the unselected block for writing is maintained at data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi such as 3.5 V.
  • the transfer MOS transistors T 0 to Tk are rendered off. At that time, source potential Vsb of the memory block MBb standing for the write selected block is maintained at ground potential GND.
  • Source potential Vsa of the memory block MBa standing for an unselected block for writing may be maintained at either data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi such as 3.5 V or ground potential GND (or floating). This is because by virtue of the transfer MOS transistors T 0 to Tk rendered to be cutoff, data line write voltage Vp fed through the Y selection circuit YSEL is not transmitted to the memory block MBa.
  • the transfer gate circuit TGC is in particular of significance in connection with the data line disturbance time of an unselected block for writing as will be described below. More specifically, when the memory block MBa is set to be a selected block for writing, a relatively high voltage Vp for write of the memory block MBa is applied through a data line to the memory block MBb preceding the transfer gate circuit TGC (on the side of Y selection circuit YSEL).
  • the common source line of the memory block MBb serving as an unselected block for writing is applied with data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi to essentially prevent data line disturbance but as this condition continues for a long time (resulting in considerable prolongation of the data line disturbance time), the threshold of a memory cell subject to write condition in the unselected memory block for writing MBb slightly decreases even if the source of the memory cell is biased by voltage Vddi, as will be clear from FIG. 28.
  • the data line disturbance time affecting a memory block of a small storage capacity owing to write concomitant with rewrite of a memory block of a large storage capacity is relatively larger than the data line disturbance time in the converse case, as described with reference to FIGS.
  • the transfer gate circuit TGC intervenes such that the memory block MBb on the side of Y selection circuit YSEL is made to be a large memory block having a relatively large storage capacity and the memory block MBa on the opposite side is made to be a small memory block having a relatively small storage capacity.
  • the memory block MBa a small memory block and making the memory block MBb a large memory block in this manner, the data line disturbance time affecting a memory cell of the memory block MBb owing to write of the memory block MBa can be far shorter than the data line disturbance time in the case where the memory block MBa is made to be a large memory block and the memory block MBb is made to be a small memory block. Through this, prevention of an erroneous operation due to data line disturbance can further be perfected.
  • the voltage application condition showing countermeasures against data line disturbance for the unselected memory block shown at (A) is representative of a memory cell transistor connected to a data line which is interrupted from the supply of write voltage by the off state of the transfer gate circuit TGC.
  • FIGS. 32, 33 and 34 are circuit diagrams in which a dummy word line is arranged between a memory block and a transfer gate circuit.
  • DWA designates a dummy word line on the side of a memory block MBa
  • DWB a dummy word line on the side of a memory block MBb.
  • One DWA of the dummy word lines is coupled with control gates of dummy cells DC 1 to DC 3 and the other DWB is coupled with control gates of dummy cells DC 4 to DC 6 .
  • Each of the dummy cells DC 0 to DC 6 is formed of the same transistor as that of a memory cell. In FIG.
  • the dummy cells DC 0 to DC 6 have their sources made to be floating and their drains coupled to data lines.
  • the dummy cells DC 0 to DC 6 have their sources and drains which are made to be floating.
  • the dummy cells DC 0 to DC 6 have their sources connected to a common source line of a corresponding memory block and their drains made to be floating.
  • Such an unevenness leads to non-uniformity of thickness of a photoresist film formed when word lines and control gates are formed through, for example, photoetching. This causes partial non-uniformity of dimensions of word lines and control gates and irregularity in electrical characteristics of transistors and word lines results.
  • irregularity in dimensions of word lines and control gates which occurs near the transfer gate circuit TGC can be reduced.
  • two memory blocks can be arranged on each side of a transfer gate circuit TGC.
  • memory blocks MBc and MBd on the side of a Y selection circuit YAEL are made to be large memory blocks and memory blocks MBb and MBa succeeding the transfer gate circuit TGC are made to be small memory blocks.
  • the large memory block is used for program storage and the small memory block is used for data storage.
  • a simultaneously erasable, minimum memory block has a single word line and the number of word lines can be increased sequentially to two, three and four. But the number of word lines of individual, simultaneously erasable memory blocks may be determined suitably or the size of individual memory blocks may be changed suitably.
  • a transfer gate circuit TGC may preferably be arranged at a boundary part between the large and small memory block groups as will be inferred from the explanation of the previous item [16].
  • the data line structure is constructed of main data lines and subsidiary data lines.
  • Main data lines DL 0 to DLk extend to reach all memory blocks MBa to MBc.
  • Subsidiary data lines d 0 to dk extend only inside each memory block to connect to drains of memory cells contained in a corresponding memory block.
  • connection of the main data lines DL 0 to DLk to the subsidiary data lines d 0 to dk is set up through a transfer gate circuit TGC allotted to each memory block.
  • Such a structure can be realized easily by, for example, a two-layer aluminum wiring structure. Since in the main/subsidiary data line structure the transfer gate circuit TGC is provided in each memory block, write data line potential Vp can be applied to only a selected block for writing. Accordingly, counter measurements against data line disturbance can further be perfected.
  • FIG. 39 shows an embodiment in which simultaneously erasable memory blocks are arranged on the left and right sides of an X address decoder.
  • Decode signals of X address decoder XADEC are delivered to the left and right sides thereof.
  • memory blocks MBa to MBc and MBa′ to MBc′ each defined in a unit of word line arranged on each side of the X address decoder XADEC are provided on the left and right sides thereof.
  • any one of the previously described memory blocks can be adopted.
  • the memory blocks on the left and right sides perform input/output of data io 0 to io 7 and data io 8 to io 15 , respectively, in a unit of 8 bits through Y selection circuits YSEL and YSEL′.
  • Transfer MOS transistors Tsw are provided between left-hand outputs of the X address decoder XADEC and word lines WL 0 to WLn in one to one correspondence relationship and similarly, transfer MOS transistors Tsw′ are provided between right-hand outputs of the X address decoder XADEC and word lines WLO ‘to WLn’ in one to one correspondence relationship.
  • control circuit DIVCONT receives a high voltage Vpp1 and the most significant address bit An of an address signal and performs complementary switching control between the left-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw and discharge MOS transistors Csw and the right-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw′ and discharge MOS transistors Csw′ in accordance with a logical value of the most significant address bit An. For example, when the most significant address bit An is logical “1”, the right-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw′ are rendered to be on and the left-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw are rendered to be off, so that write data can be supplied through the right-hand Y selection circuit YSEL′.
  • the right-hand discharge MOS transistors Csw′ are rendered to be off and the left-hand discharge MOS transistors Csw are rendered to be off.
  • the most significant address bit An is logical “0”
  • the left-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw are rendered to be on and the right-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw′ are rendered to be off, so that write data is supplied through the left-hand Y selection circuit YSEL.
  • the right-hand discharge MOS transistors Csw′ are rendered to be on and the left-hand discharge MOS transistors Csw are rendered to be off.
  • Selection operation of the left-hand and right-hand Y selection circuits YSEL and YSEL′ depends on a decode output of a Y address decoder YADEC but any one of the left-hand and right-hand Y selection circuits YSEL and YSEL′ may be activated by the most significant address bit An or a signal equivalent thereto or any one of the left-hand and right-hand Y selection circuits may be selected as the supply path of write data by means of a separate selection circuit not shown.
  • a signal voltage for rendering the transfer MOS transistors Tsw and Tsw′ on is set to a high voltage during write and an example of the control circuit DIVCONT for this purpose is shown in FIG. 40.
  • a voltage Vpp1 in FIG. 40 can be generated using a power supply circuit of FIG. 51 to be described later.
  • a configuration may be mentioned in which an X address decoder is arranged at one end side of word lines.
  • the word line direction size of a memory block defined in a minimum unit of word line is doubled as compared to that in FIG. 39.
  • this configuration can contribute to reduction of the word line disturbance time of a selected block for writing. More particularly, with reference to FIG. 26B, in the selected block 30 for writing, there is a memory cell associated with a word line applied with high voltage Vpp and with a data line not applied with write voltage Vp.
  • the memory cell placed in word line selection condition and data line non-selection condition suffers from a large potential difference between the control gate and floating gate, with the result that electric charge is discharged from the floating gate to the control gate and the threshold of the memory cell transistor is forced to be decreased undesirably.
  • This phenomenon is word line disturbance and in proportion to prolongation of this state, the threshold decreases.
  • time for the word line disturbance state to continue is desired to be short.
  • the configuration of FIG. 39 is more advantageous than the comparative configuration in that the number of memory cells exposed to the word line disturbance state can be halved on the presumption that write is effected in a unit of 8 bits. This contributes to reduction of the word line disturbance time.
  • FIG. 41 shows an embodiment directed to the provision of redundant words in a memory block.
  • a redundant word line WRa a redundant data line DR and redundant memory cells RC for relieving a defective word line are arranged in a memory block MBa and a redundant word line WRb, a redundant data line DR and redundant memory cells RC for the same purpose are arranged in a memory block MBb.
  • the redundant words provided in the memory blocks MBa and MBb when a defective word is desired to be relieved, the defective word can be relieved using a redundant word in the same block as a memory block to which the defective word belongs.
  • memory blocks MBrd and MBrd′ dedicated to redundancy may be provided as shown in FIG. 42.
  • FIG. 43 shows an embodiment in which some memory blocks are formed into one-time programmable areas (OTP-flash). In an area formed into a one-time programmable area, only one-time write of desired data is allowed.
  • memory blocks MBc and MBd are memory blocks which are formed into one-time programmable areas. Structurally, the memory blocks MBc and MBd per se which are formed into one-time programmable areas are quite the same as the other memory blocks.
  • a specified memory block can be formed into a one-time programmable area by selectively suppressing rewrite of the memory block in question.
  • a designation bit of an erase register for designating a memory block which is scheduled to be formed into a one-time programmable area is forced to assume an unselection level by means of a nonvolatile memory device and a path for supplying a write voltage to a word line of the memory block of interest is so designed as to be breakable by means of the nonvolatile memory device.
  • the memory block formed into a one-time programmable area and the other memory blocks can have in common an X address decoder, a Y address decoder and data lines.
  • a transistor similar to a memory cell transistor of the flash memory may be utilized as the nonvolatile memory device.
  • source lines Vsc and Vsd of the memory blocks formed into one-time programmable areas are applied with the data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi to prevent a data line disturbance defect of these memory blocks.
  • Vddi data line disturbance prevention voltage
  • some memory blocks formed into one-time programmable areas in this manner, occurrence of such a trouble that data once written is subsequently rewritten undesirably can be prevented.
  • the memory block formed into a one-time programmable area can be utilized as a program holding area or a data holding area which needs to be prevented from being altered.
  • FIG. 44 shows a configuration in which some memory blocks are formed into mask ROM's, in place of the configuration in which some memory blocks are formed into one-time programmable areas.
  • memory blocks MBc and MBd are areas which are formed into mask ROM's.
  • write of the memory blocks MBc and MBd becomes absolutely impossible.
  • word lines of the memory blocks MBc and MBd formed into mask ROM's are inhibited from being applied with a write high voltage and source lines Vsc and Vsd of these memory blocks are biased by a voltage such as Vddi.
  • Vddi Upon erase, the common source lines Vsc and Vsd of the memory blocks MBc and MBd are inhibited from being applied with an erase high voltage.
  • FIG. 45 shows an example of a layout configuration of memory blocks.
  • the layout configuration shown in the figure is an example where a transfer gate circuit TGC is not arranged between memory blocks MBa and MBb.
  • a memory cell includes a control gate 11 integral with a word line, a floating gate (fg) 8 formed separately from the control gate to underlie it, a drain formed of an N type semiconductor region 13 and a P type semiconductor region 14 , and a source formed of the N type semiconductor region 13 and an N type semiconductor region 15 .
  • Individual memory cells are separated from each other by a thick field insulating film 4 .
  • Word lines WL 0 to WLi+2 are separated from each other and formed in parallel in the lateral direction in the figure.
  • Data lines DL 0 to DL 8 are formed of a first wiring layer 23 having a first aluminum layer (Al1) and are separated from each other so as to be arranged in intersectional relation with the word lines, thus extending in parallel in the longitudinal direction in the figure.
  • the data line is connected to the drain common to an adjacent memory cell through a contact (CONT) 22 .
  • Sources of memory cells are each formed of the N type semiconductor regions 13 and 15 and are connected every 8 bits to a source line SL formed of the first wiring layer 23 through the contact 22 .
  • the source line SL is parallel to the data lines DL 0 to DL 8 .
  • the source line SL in each memory block is broken at the block end so as to be disconnected from the source line SL of an adjacent memory block.
  • FIG. 46 shows an example of a layout configuration in which a transfer gate circuit is provided between memory blocks.
  • the transfer gate circuit is constructed by arranging transfer MOS transistors T 0 to TB each formed of a high breakdown voltage N channel type MOS transistor having its gate electrode in the form of a first conductive layer 8 between common source lines SA and SB of adjacent memory blocks MBa and MBb. In this case, data lines are broken at adjacent ends of the memory blocks MBa and MBb.
  • a broken end of one of the data lines having mutually opposing broken ends is connected to the drain of each of the transfer MOS transistor T 0 to T 8 through a contact 22 and a broken end of the other data line is connected to the source of each of the transfer MOS transistors T 0 to T 7 through a contact 22 .
  • a memory cell at an end of each of the opposing memory blocks is used as a dummy cell having its source being, in this example, floating.
  • FIG. 47 shows a configuration in which the drain of a dummy cell is floating in contrast to the configuration of FIG. 46.
  • FIG. 48 shows an example of a layout configuration in which transfer MOS transistors T 0 to T 7 are substantially increased in size.
  • the gate width of each of the transfer MOS transistors T 0 to T 7 is increased to prevent a decrease in data line potential caused by each of the transfer MOS transistors T 0 to T 7 .
  • the transfer MOS transistors T 0 , T 2 , T 4 and T 6 are arranged on the side of a memory block MBa in parallel with word lines and the transfer MOS transistors T 1 , T 3 , T 5 and T 7 are arranged on the side of a memory block MBb in parallel with word lines.
  • a data line DL 0 extending from the side of memory block MBb passes above the transfer MOS transistor T 1 so as to be coupled to the transfer MOS transistor T 0 and a data line DL 0 extending from the side of memory block MBa is coupled to the transfer MOS transistor T 0 .
  • An adjacent data line DL 1 extending from the side of memory block MBa passes above the transfer MOS transistor T 0 so as to be coupled to the transfer MOS transistor T 1 and a data line DL 1 extending from the side of memory block MBb is coupled to the transfer MOS transistor T 1 .
  • the other transfer MOS transistors are also coupled to data lines in a similar manner.
  • the number of stacking of transfer MOS transistors is not limited to 2 as above but can equal the number of data lines between source lines SL at maximum.
  • FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of the whole of a flash memory applied with pluralization of memory blocks in a unit of word line and countermeasures against data line disturbance.
  • the flash memory shown in the figure is incorporated in a microcomputer.
  • 210 designates a memory array in which memory cells each constructed of an insulated gate field effect transistor of two-layer gate structure as previously explained with reference to, for example, FIG. 11 are arranged in matrix.
  • the memory array ARY as in the case of the configuration explained in connection with FIG.
  • 200 designates an address buffer and address latch circuit having its input coupled to an internal address bus of a microcomputer.
  • 201 is an X address decoder (XADEC) for driving a word line by decoding a row address signal (X address signal) latched in the address buffer and address latch circuit 200 .
  • X address decoder 201 drives a given word line with a voltage of, for example, 5V in a data read operation and drives a given word line with a high voltage of, for example, 12V in a data write operation.
  • all outputs of the X address decoder 201 are maintained at a low voltage level of, for example, 0V.
  • Denoted by 202 is a Y address decoder (YADEC) for decoding a Y address signal latched in the address buffer and address latch circuit 200 .
  • Denoted by 203 is a Y selection circuit (YSEL) for selecting a data line in accordance with a data line selection signal delivered out of the Y address decoder 202 .
  • the data line is related to the Y selection circuit such that one memory mat corresponds to one I/O as described with reference to FIG. 25.
  • the memory array is divided into 16 memory mats. In this case, each of the memory blocks MB 1 to MBn extends over 16 memory mats.
  • Denoted by 204 is a sense amplifier (SAMP) for amplifying a read signal from a data line selected by the Y selection circuit 203 in a data read operation.
  • the sense amplifier includes 16 amplifier circuits in correspondence to output bits of the memory mats.
  • Denoted by 205 is a data output latch (DOLAT) for holding an output of the sense amplifier 204 .
  • Denoted by 206 is a data output buffer (DOBUFF) for delivering data held in the data output latch 205 to the outside.
  • DOBUFF data output buffer
  • An output of the data output buffer 206 is coupled to a 16-bit internal data bus of the microcomputer in bit correspondence relationship. According to this example, read data is of 2 bytes at maximum.
  • Denoted by 207 is a data input buffer (DIBUFF) for fetching write data supplied from the outside.
  • Data fetched in from the data input buffer 207 is held in a data input latch (DILAT) 208 .
  • DILAT data input latch
  • a write circuit (WRIT) 209 supplies a write high voltage to a data line selected by the Y selection circuit 203 . This write high voltage is supplied to the drain of a memory cell having its control gate applied with a high voltage in accordance with an X address signal, causing the memory cell of interest to be written.
  • Each of the erase circuits ERS 1 to ERSn supplies an erase high voltage to a source line of a designated memory block to perform simultaneous erase of the memory block. Which one of the erase circuits is to be caused to effect an erase operation is controlled by a setting bit of an erase block designation register 231 .
  • the erase block designation register 231 corresponds to the registers MBREG 1 and MBREG 2 explained with reference to FIG. 18.
  • the erase circuits ERS 1 to ERSn are operative upon writing to apply ground potential GND to a source line of a selected block for writing and data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi to a source line of an unselected block for writing. This control is carried out by an unselected block designation circuit for writing 230 .
  • the unselected block designation circuit for writing 230 receives an X address signal delivered out of the address buffer and address latch circuit 200 and decodes the signal to decide a selected block for writing, designate the application of ground potential GND to an erase circuit associated with the selected block for writing and designate the application of data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi to an erase circuit associated with an unselected block for writing.
  • 240 designates a control circuit for performing timing control of a data read operation and selection control of various timings and voltages for write and erase.
  • FIG. 50 shows an example of the control circuit 240 .
  • the control circuit 240 has a power supply circuit 241 , a memory read/write control circuit 242 , a register control circuit 243 and a control register 244 .
  • the control register 244 has the program/erase control register PEREG explained in connection with FIGS. 16 and 18.
  • the control circuit FCONT shown in FIG. 16 may be considered to correspond to the control circuit 240 and the erase block designation register 231 shown in FIG. 49.
  • An erase signal E, a write signal W, an erase verification signal EV and a write verification signal WV correspond to an E bit, a P bit, an EV bit and a PV bit of the program/erase control register PEREG.
  • an erase/write operation is controlled in accordance with the contents set in the program/erase control register PEREG.
  • the register control circuit 243 controls read/write of the program/erase control register PEREG and erase block designation register 231 (MBREG 1 and MBREG 2 ) included in the control register 244 .
  • the memory read/write control circuit 242 controls operation of the data input buffer 207 , data input latch circuit 208 , data output buffer 206 , data output latch circuit 205 , address buffer and address latch circuit 200 as well as operation of the power supply circuit 241 .
  • the power supply circuit 241 receives power supply voltage Vcc such as 5V and high voltage Vpp such as 12V and forms voltages Vpp1, VppS and Vcc1 in accordance with a setting bit of the program/erase control register PEREG included in the control register 244 and an output control signal of the memory read/write control circuit 242 .
  • FIG. 51 shows an example of a circuit diagram of the power supply circuit 241 .
  • the power supply circuit 241 includes a reference voltage generation circuit 2410 , a decoder drive power supply circuit 2411 , a source circuit drive power supply circuit 2412 and a sense amplifier drive power supply circuit 2413 .
  • a high voltage Vpp e.g., 12V
  • V1 e.g., 3.5V
  • V2 e.g., 6.5V
  • the decoder drive power supply circuit 2411 generates voltage Vpp1 for determining a drive voltage of word line.
  • the operation state of the flash memory is transmitted to the power supply circuit 241 by means of a control signal 2414 from the control register 244 and memory read/write control circuit 242 so that an internal switch circuit may be controlled to optimize the value of voltage Vpp1 in accordance with the operation state.
  • An example of an output waveform of voltage Vpp1 varying with the internal operation state is shown in FIG. 52.
  • the decoder drive power supply circuit 2411 has a detection circuit 2415 for detecting or discriminating whether the power supply voltage Vcc has a higher voltage (e.g., 5V) or a lower voltage (e.g., 3V) than the threshold voltage (e.g., 4V) and a booster circuit 2416 for boosting power supply voltage Vcc when the power supply voltage Vcc is detected as being lower than the threshold voltage.
  • a boosted voltage is utilized when a read operation is effected with the power source voltage Vcc (such as of 3V) lower than the threshold voltage.
  • the source circuit drive power supply circuit 2412 generates voltage VppS utilized for drive of source line in accordance with the control signal 2414 .
  • the sense amplifier drive power supply circuit 2413 generates voltage Vcc1 utilized as drive voltage of the sense amplifier in accordance with the control signal 2414 .
  • Voltage waveforms of voltages VppS and Vcc1 varying with the internal state of the flash memory are depicted in FIG. 52.
  • FIG. 53A shows an example of the X address decoder 201 .
  • the X address decoder consists of a pre-decoder 2010 for receiving an X address signal, a decode section 2011 for decoding an output of the pre-decoder and a drive section 2011 for driving a word line on the basis of an output of the decode section 2011 .
  • the pre-decoder 2010 and decode section 2011 are operated with a power supply voltage Vcc such as 5V system.
  • the drive section 2012 is constructed as a high voltage driven system which is driven by a voltage such as the voltage Vpp1.
  • Denoted by 2013 is a high breakdown voltage N channel type MOS transistor for separating the 5V system from the high voltage system.
  • the transfer gate circuit TGC as described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35 the large memory blocks LMB 0 to LMB 6 shown in FIG. 16 correspond to memory blocks MB 1 to MB 7 of FIG. 49 and the small memory blocks SMB 0 to SMB 7 correspond to memory blocks MB 8 to MBn of FIG. 49.
  • the transfer gate circuit TGC is arranged between the memory blocks MB 7 and MB 8 , though not illustrated particularly.
  • FIG. 53B shows an example of a selection circuit 250 for generating a switching signal DT of the transfer gate circuit TGC.
  • the selection circuit 250 receives the voltage Vpp1 from the power supply circuit 241 , address signal from the address buffer 20 B and write signal from the control circuit 240 to cut off the transfer gate circuit TGC upon write of the large memory blocks.
  • the signal DT is set to 0V corresponding to ground potential upon write of the large memory block but in the other case, set to voltage Vpp1, though not limitedly.
  • FIG. 54 shows an example of the erase circuit and FIG. 55 shows its operational timing chart. Supplied to each of the erase circuits ERS 1 to ERSn is operating voltage represented by the voltage VppS and power supply voltage Vdd. Signal E/W* shown in the figure is a signal which is maintained at 0 level upon write or erase. When a bit supplied from the erase block designation register to the erase circuit of FIG. 54 is “1” level (erase designating level), erase signal E from the control circuit 240 is also rendered to be “1” level and supply voltage Vs to a source line is set to the voltage VppS. Voltage Vpps upon erase is set to Vpp as described with reference to FIG. 52.
  • simultaneous erase of memory cells can be done.
  • a control signal supplied from the upon-write unselected block designation circuit to the erase circuit of FIG. 54 is “1” level (level for designating an unselected block) for writing
  • write signal W from the control circuit 240 is also rendered to be “1” level and supply voltage Vs to the source line is set to the voltage VppS.
  • Voltage VppS upon write is maintained at data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi such as 3.5V. Through this, data line disturbance can be prevented in the unselected block for writing.
  • FIG. 56 shows a timing chart of a series of operations related to erase in the flash memory shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 57 shows a timing chart of a series of operations related to write in the flash memory shown in FIG. 49.
  • Control signal FLM is a signal for designating the operation mode of the flash memory FMRY, whereby its “0” designates the first operation mode and its “1” designates the second operation mode. This signal FLM is formed on the basis of, for example, the mode signals MD 0 to MD 2 .
  • the memory write strobe signal M2WRN is deemed as a strobe signal for writing data to be written in a memory cell into the data input latch DILAT. Actual write to the memory cell is started by setting a P bit of the program/erase control register PEREG.
  • a series of operations related to erase are mainly sorted into a setup erase, an erase and an erase verify as shown in FIG. 56.
  • the setup erase consists of an operation of writing data for designation of a memory block to be erased simultaneously into the erase block designation register and an operation of writing a bit (flag) of logic “1” into an E bit of the program/erase control register PEREG.
  • the erase is an operation of erasing a memory block simultaneously and is started by setting “1” in the E bit.
  • the specific processing procedure of an erase operation is the same as the contents explained in connection with FIG. 22.
  • the erase verify is started by clearing the E bit so that verify may be carried out sequentially in a unit of byte, beginning with a head address, in accordance with the contents explained in connection with FIG. 22.
  • the setup program consists of an operation of writing data to be written into the data input latch circuit, an operation of storing a memory address to be written to the address buffer and address latch circuit and an operation of writing a bit (flag) of logic “1” to a P bit of the program/erase control register PEREG.
  • the program is an operation of writing a memory cell designated by a latched address in accordance with data written in the data input latch circuit.
  • a specific processing procedure of a write operation is the same as the contents explained in connection with FIG. 22.
  • the program verify is started by clearing the P bit so that verify may be carried out sequentially in a unit of byte, beginning with a head address, in accordance with the contents explained in connection with FIG. 22.
  • Operation timings shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 are essentially the same for any of the first and second operation modes and techniques described in the foregoing items [3] and [4] can be adopted.
  • rewrite is conducted by means of the general purpose PROM writer, part of processings can be put under the charge of the CPU built in the microcomputer and other logics by utilizing a rewrite support control program precedently prepared in the mask ROM built in the microcomputer.
  • the flash memory shown in FIG. 49 can obviously be applied to the microcomputer MCU explained in connection with FIGS. 1 to 4 or may be constructed as a unitary flash memory chip.
  • FIGS. 58A to 58 I show longitudinal sectional views of a device in the production processes of various transistors for constituting the flash memory or the microcomputer incorporating the same. Illustrated in each figure are six kinds of transistors which are, as viewed from the left in turn in each figure, a memory cell transistor of the flash memory, high breakdown voltage NMOS and PMOS used for write and erase of the flash memory, logic system NMOS and PMOS for formation of a peripheral logic such as CPU and a Zener diode used for generation of a reference voltage upon write/erase read of the flash memory.
  • N type wells 2 and P type wells 3 are formed in a major surface of a P type semiconductor substrate 1 through known techniques.
  • P type channel stopper layers 5 are formed through substantially the same process as that of thick field insulating films 4 through known techniques.
  • first gate insulating films 6 of the high breakdown voltage NMOS (N channel type MOS transistor) and PMOS (P channel type MOS transistor) are formed.
  • the gate insulating film 6 is so formed as to have a thickness of 30 to 50 nm by a thermal oxidization method conducted at a temperature of 850 to 950° C.
  • the first gate insulating film 6 is removed at an area for formation of the flash memory by using a mask such as photoresist to expose the surface of the P type semiconductor substrate 1 .
  • Insulating films of about 10 nm are formed (not shown) by a thermal oxidization method conducted at a temperature of 800 to 850° C.
  • first conductive layers 8 are formed which serve as a floating gate electrode of the flash memory and gate electrodes of the high breakdown voltage NMOS and PMOS.
  • the grain size of polycrystalline silicon needs to be small and therefore the thermal diffusion is conducted at a temperature of 900° C. or less to provide a grain size of 0.1 ⁇ m or less.
  • An inter-layer insulating film 9 is formed between a floating gate electrode and a control gate electrode of the flash memory.
  • the inter-layer insulating film 9 is a laminated film of a silicon oxide film and a silicon nitride film, the laminated film consisting of, as viewed from the first conductive layer 8 side, a two-layer film of silicon oxide film and silicon nitride film or a four-layer film of silicon oxide film, silicon nitride film, silicon oxide film and silicon nitride film.
  • the silicon oxide film overlying the first conductive layer 8 is formed to have a film thickness of 10 to 20 nm through thermal diffusion conducted at a temperature of 850 to 950°.
  • the silicon nitride film overlying the silicon oxide film is formed to have a film thickness of 20 to 30 nm through CVD process.
  • the silicon oxide film on the silicon nitride film are formed to have a film thickness of 2 to 5 nm by a thermal oxidization method conducted at a temperature of 900 to 950°.
  • the silicon nitride film overlying the silicon oxide film of 2 to 5 nm is formed to have a thickness of 10 to 15 nm through CVD process. Either of the two-layer film and four-layer film is so formed as to have a total thickness of 20 to 30 nm in terms of silicon oxide film.
  • second gate insulating films 10 serving as gate insulating films of the logic system NMOS and PMOS are formed.
  • the second gate insulating film 10 is formed to have a thickness of 10 to 20 nm in wet atmosphere by a thermal oxidization method conducted at 800 to 850° C.
  • second conductive layers 11 which serve as a control gate electrode of the flash memory and gate electrodes of the logic system NMOS and PMOS.
  • the second conductive layer has a laminated structure of polycrystalline silicon film, high melting point metal silicide film and silicon oxide film which are laminated one after another in this order from the bottom.
  • the silicon oxide film is formed through CVD process to have a thickness of 100 to 150 nm.
  • This silicon oxide film is a protective film for the polycrystalline silicon film and high melting point metal silicide film serving as an actual control gate electrode or a gate electrode and protects high melting point metal from damage such as ion implantation or dry etching.
  • control gate electrode 11 , inter-layer insulating film 9 and floating gate electrode 8 of the flash memory are formed in self-align fashion through dry etching using a mask such as photoresist.
  • the insulating film 12 is a protective film which is a silicon oxide film formed to have a thickness of 10 to 20 nm through CVD process.
  • N type semiconductor region 13 and a P type semiconductor layer 14 are formed at source and drain regions of the flash memory by using the second conductive layer 11 as a mask.
  • the N type semiconductor region 13 is formed by injecting arsenic by about 1 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 2 at 50 to 80 keV accelerating energy through ion implantation process.
  • the P type semiconductor layer 14 is formed by injecting boron by 1 ⁇ 10 13 to 1 ⁇ 10 14 cm ⁇ 2 at 20 to 60 kev accelerating energy through ion implantation process.
  • Gate electrodes of the logic system NMOS and PMOS are formed through dry etching using a mask such as photoresist. During the etching, the flash memory region, which is covered with the mask, is not etched. The second conductive layers 11 at areas unnecessary for formation of the high breakdown voltage NMOS and PMOS and at the area for formation of the Zener diode are removed.
  • an N type semiconductor region 15 is formed at the source region of the flash memory by using a mask such as photoresist.
  • the N type semiconductor region is formed by injecting phosphorous by about 5 ⁇ 10 cm ⁇ 2 at 50 to 80 kev accelerating energy through ion implantation.
  • the N type semiconductor region 15 is thermally diffused through a heat treatment conducted at about 950° C. for about 30 minutes to 2 hours to cover the source region of the P type semiconductor layer 14 .
  • the drain region has a two-layer structure of the N type semiconductor region 13 and the P type semiconductor layer 14 for improving threshold control and write efficiency.
  • the source region has a two-layer structure of the N type semiconductor region 13 based on arsenic and the N type semiconductor region 15 based on phosphorous for improving source breakdown voltage upon erase.
  • An N type semiconductor region 16 is formed by injecting phosphorous by 2 to 4 ⁇ 10 13 cm ⁇ 2 at 50 kev accelerating energy through ion implantation process using a mask such as photoresist.
  • a P type semiconductor region 17 is formed over the entire surface by injecting boron by 1 to 2 ⁇ 10 13 cm ⁇ 2 through ion implantation process. Boron is also injected into the NMOS region but this region has high concentration of phosphorous and therefore is allowed to substantially act as an N type semiconductor.
  • an N type semiconductor region is formed by injecting arsenic by 1 to 5 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 2 at 60 kev accelerating energy and a P type semiconductor region 20 is formed by injecting boron by 1 to 2 ⁇ 10 15 cm ⁇ 2 at 15 kev accelerating energy.
  • a Zener diode is formed of the N type semiconductor region 19 and P type semiconductor region 20 , having a Zener voltage of 3 to 4V.
  • the insulating film 21 is formed of a silicon oxide film of about 150 nm film thickness and a BPSG film of 400 to 500 nm film thickness which are prepared through CVD process.
  • a first wiring layer 23 is formed.
  • the first wiring layer 23 is formed of a laminated film of high melting point metal silicide and aluminum.
  • the first wiring layer 23 is also used as a data line and a source line of the flash memory.
  • the insulating film 24 is a laminated film of a silicon oxide film/spin-on-glass film prepared through plasma CVD process and a silicon oxide film prepared through plasma CVD process.
  • a second wiring layer 26 is formed.
  • the second wiring layer 26 has the same film structure as the first wiring layer 23 .
  • the second wiring layer 26 is used for shunting the second conductive layers 11 serving as word lines of the flash memory.
  • a final passivation film 27 is formed to end in completion.
  • the final passivation film 27 is a laminated film of a silicon oxide film prepared through CVD process or plasma CVD process and a silicon nitride film prepared through plasma CVD process.
  • N type wells 2 and P type wells 3 are formed in a major surface of an N type semiconductor substrate 101 to accomplish separation. To this end, as shown in FIG. 67, the N type semiconductor substrate 101 is used in place of the P type semiconductor substrate 1 .
  • a double well structure (P type well 3 /N type well 2 /P type semiconductor substrate 1 ) is used for separation. In this case,
  • An N type well 2 is formed in a major surface of the P type semiconductor substrate 1 . At that time, an N type well 2 is also formed at an area for formation of the flash memory and besides,
  • the P type well 3 is made to be more shallow than the N type well 2 .
  • a double well structure (P type well 3 /N type well 102 /P type semiconductor substrate 1 ) is used for separation. In this case,
  • a deep N type well 102 is formed in a major surface of a P type semiconductor substrate 1 at an area for formation of the flash memory, and
  • a memory block having a storage capacity which is set to be smaller than that of a built-in RAM can be provided so that the built-in RAM may be used as a working area or a data buffer area for rewrite of that memory block.
  • a memory block to be erased simultaneously can be designated internally and externally of the microcomputer MCU (built-in central processing unit, external PROM writer) with ease in accordance with the same procedure.
  • one bit of input/output data corresponds to one memory mat.
  • a common data line CD can be separated at each memory mat and need not extend over a long distance which passes through all of the memory mats, so that parasitic capacitance associated with the common data line can be reduced to contribute to speed-up of access and a low voltage operation.
  • the minimum memory block in the whole of memory array ARY has a storage capacity corresponding to that of one word line. This holds true regardless of the number of parallel input/output bits of the flash memory. Accordingly, by defining memory blocks each in a unit of word line, the storage capacity of the minimum memory block can be made to be small more easily and especially, in the case of a memory which is built in a microcomputer and in which input/output of data is effected in a unit of byte or word, the minimum size of memory block can be reduced drastically. Through this, ease of use of the flash memory built in the microcomputer can further be improved, thus contributing to improvement in efficiency of rewrite of small scale data in a unit of memory block.
  • the data line disturbance time affecting memory cells of a memory block MBb owing to write of a memory block MBa can be far more decreased in the case where the memory blocks MBa are small memory blocks and the memory blocks MBb are large memory blocks than in the case where the memory blocks MBa are otherwise large memory blocks and the memory blocks MBb are otherwise small memory blocks. In this manner, prevention of erroneous operations due to data line disturbance can further be perfected.
  • the peripheral circuits incorporated in the microcomputer are not limited to those in the forgoing embodiments but may be changed suitably.
  • Memory cell transistors of the flash memory are not limited to MOS transistors of stacked gate structure in the foregoing embodiments and memory cell transistors of FLOTOX type using a tunnel phenomenon also in a write operation can also be used.
  • controlling of both of erase and write of the flash memory is realized by way of software means as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 but the invention is not limited thereto and for example, simultaneous erase requiring relatively much time may be controlled by dedicated hardware built in the flash memory.
  • the dedicated hardware includes control logic for controlling setting and clear of E bit and EV bit and for performing verify of the erase state.
  • control logic for simultaneous erase into the flash memory can, on the one hand, improve ease of use by the user in that software load concerning simultaneous erase can be mitigated but on the other hand increases the area of the control logic.
  • a memory block may be used in which the word line is used as a common line in erase. Which one of the memory blocks is to be selected can be determined by taking into consideration circumstances of what polarity of erase voltage is used or which one of the number of memory cells connected to a single word line and the number of memory cells connected to a single data line is smaller when the storage capacity of simultaneous erase unit is to be minimized.
  • the size of memory block is not limited to the fixed size in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the size can be varied in accordance with setting of the control register or designation by the mode signal.
  • the operation of the driver for driving the word line with the erase voltage can be selected in accordance with the setting of the control register or the designation by the mode signal.
  • the division of memory blocks the whole may be divided into a plurality of large blocks LMB 0 to LMB 7 and each large block may be divided into a plurality of small blocks SMB 0 to SMB 7 as shown in FIG. 24, whereby simultaneous erase can be done in a unit of large block or in a unit of small block.
  • a memory cell transistor of the flash memory its source and drain are relatively defined in accordance with voltages applied thereto.
  • the present invention can be applied widely to a flash memory in which write can be done by effecting simultaneous erase in a unit of at least memory block and to a microcomputer conditioned by comprising, on a single semiconductor chip, a central processing unit and a flash memory which is electrically rewritable.

Abstract

A semiconductor device having an electrically erasable and programmable nonvolatile memory, for example, a rewritable nonvolatile memory including memory cells arranged in rows and columns and disposed to facilitate both flash erasure as well as selective erasure of individual units of plural memory cells. The semiconductor device which functions as a microcomputer chip also has a processing unit and includes an input terminal for receiving an operation mode signal for switching the microcomputer between a first operation mode in which the flash memory is rewritten under control of a processing unit and a second operation mode in which the flash memory is rewritten under control of separate writing circuit externally connectable to the microcomputer.

Description

  • This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 10/252,438, filed Sep. 24, 2002; which, in turn, is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/987,957, filed Nov. 16, 2001, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,493,271; which, in turn, is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/705,835, filed Nov. 6, 2000, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,335,879; which, in turn, was a continuation of application Ser. No. 09/414,944, filed Oct. 8, 1999, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,166,953; which, in turn, was a continuation of application Ser. No. 09/144,194, filed Aug. 31, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,064,593; which, in turn, was a continuation of application Ser. No. 08/788,198, filed Jan. 24, 1997, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,026,020; which, in turn, was a continuation of application Ser. No. 08/473,114, filed Jun. 7, 1995, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,768,194; and which, in turn, was a continuation of application Ser. No. 08/031,877, filed Mar. 16, 1993, now abandoned; and the entire disclosures of all of which are incorporated herein by reference. [0001]
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to a nonvolatile flash memory in which information is rewritable by electrical erasing/writing and a microcomputer incorporating the same. [0002]
  • JP-A-1-161469 (Laid-open on Jun. 26, 1989) describes a microcomputer having, as a programmable nonvolatile memory, an EPROM (erasable and programmable read only memory) or an EEPROM (electrically erasable and programmable read only memory) carried on a single semiconductor chip. Data and programs are held in such an on-chip nonvolatile memory of the microcomputer. Since information stored in the EPROM is erased by means of ultraviolet rays, the EPROM must be removed from a system on which it is mounted in order for the EPROM to be rewritten. The EEPROM can be erased and written electrically and therefore information stored therein can be rewritten with the EEPROM mounted on a system. However, memory cells constituting the EEPROM must be comprised of, in addition to memory devices such as MNOSs (metal nitride oxide semiconductors), selecting transistors and hence the EEPROM requires a relatively large chip occupation area being, for example, about 2.5 to 5 times as large as that of the EPROM. [0003]
  • JP-A-2-289997 (Laid-open on Nov. 29, 1990) describes a simultaneous erasing type EEPROM. This simultaneous erasing type EEPROM can be described as operating as a flash memory, such as described in the present specification. In the flash memory, information can be rewritten by electrical erasing and writing, each memory cell can be constructed of a single transistor as in the EPROM and, functionally, all memory cells or a block of memory cells can be erased simultaneously by electrical erasing. Accordingly, in the flash memory, information stored therein can be rewritten with the flash memory mounted on a system, the time for rewrite can be shortened by virtue of its simultaneous erasing function and contribution to reduction of the area occupied by a chip can be accomplished. [0004]
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,065,364 (issued on Nov. 12, 1991) shows a flash memory of the type in which an array of electrically erasable and rewritable memory cells having control gates, drains and sources is divided into a plurality of memory blocks in a unit of data line, source lines in common to each block are led out and a voltage complying with an operation is applied separately to a source line by means of a source switch provided in each source line. At that time, ground potential is applied to the source line of a block selected for writing. A voltage VDI of, for example, 3.5V is applied to the source line of a block not selected for writing. The voltage VDI guards against word line disturbance. The word line disturbance referred to herein is a phenomenon that for example, in a memory cell having a word line conditioned for selection and a data line conditioned for unselection, the potential difference between the control gate and floating gate is increased and as a result, electric charge is discharged from floating gate to control gate to decrease the threshold of the memory cell transistor. [0005]
  • JP-A-59-29488 (laid-open on Feb. 16, 1991) and JP-A-3-78195 (laid-open on Apr. 3, 1991) describe an ultraviolet light-erasable EPROM in which sources of memory cells connected with the same word line are connected in common and a source potential control switch is provided for the commonly connected sources. JP-A-3-78195 (laid-open on Apr. 3, 1991) describes an ultraviolet light-erasable EPROM in which sources of memory cells connected with adjacent two word lines are connected in common and a source potential control switch is provided for each adjacent two word lines. Each of the inventions disclosed in these three references is intended to provide a solution to a problem of erroneous writing/reading caused by leak current from an unselected memory cell in an EEPROM. [0006]
  • U.S. application Ser. No. 07/942,028 filed Sep. 8, 1992, which is a continuation application of U.S. application Ser. No. 07/568,071 filed Aug. 16, 1990, discloses a structure of a flash memory in which sources of memory cells are connected in common for the purpose of preventing a word line disturb problem for a writing operation. [0007]
  • Meanwhile, JP-A-3-14272 (laid-open on Jan. 22, 1991), JP-A-3-250495 (laid-open on Nov. 8, 1991) and JP-A-2-241060 (laid-open on Sep. 25, 1990) describe division of a memory cell array in a unit to data line. [0008]
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present inventors have first studied the fact that a flash memory is carried on a microcomputer to find out the following points. [0009]
  • (1) Programs and data are stored in a ROM incorporated or built in the microcomputer. Data is classified into data of a large capacity and data of a small capacity. When the programs and data are to be rewritten, the former data is typically rewritten in a large unit of severals of tens of KB (kilobyte) and the latter data is typically rewritten in a small unit of severals of tens of B (byte). At that time, if the flash memory is erased in a unit of chip batch or in a unit of memory block of the same size, inconvenience that the erase unit matches with a program area but is excessively large for a data area to impair ease of use thereof may occur or the converse case may occur. [0010]
  • (2) When part of information held in the flash memory is desired to be rewritten after the microcomputer is mounted on a system, it suffices to use part of the memory block holding the information of interest as an object to be rewritten. But if all simultaneously erasable memory blocks have an equal storage capacity, then even when rewrite of only a smaller amount of information than the storage capacity of a memory block is desired, the memory block of a relatively large storage capacity must be erased simultaneously and thereafter write is carried out over the whole of the memory block in question, with the result that time is consumed wastefully for rewrite of information not substantially required to be rewritten. [0011]
  • (3) Information to be written into the flash memory is determined in accordance with the system to which the microcomputer is applied but efficiency may sometimes be degraded when the information is all written from the beginning with the microcomputer of interest mounted on the system. [0012]
  • (4) When the flash memory is rewritten with the microcomputer mounted, it sometimes suffices that only part of information of a memory block, standing for an object to be rewritten, is rewritten. But even in this case, if information to be written into the whole of the memory block which has been erased simultaneously is all received sequentially externally of the microcomputer and rewritten, all of the information to be written into the whole of the memory block of interest will have to be received from the outside in spite of the fact that it suffices to rewrite only part of information of the memory block to be rewritten, and transfer, from the outside, of information not substantially required to be rewritten, that is, information held internally in advance of rewrite must be repeated, resulting in wastefulness of transfer of information for partial rewrite of the memory block. [0013]
  • (5) Because of information storing mechanism, the time for rewriting the flash memory through simultaneous erasing is far longer as compared to a memory such as RAM (random access memory) and so the flash memory cannot be rewritten on real time base in synchronism with machine control operation by the microcomputer. [0014]
  • The present inventors have studied the division of memory blocks in a unit of data line to find that the size of the minimum memory block can be decreased more easily by division into memory blocks in a unit of word line and using sources in common in a block and this is advantageous also from the standpoint of improving ease of use of the flash memory built in the microcomputer as studied firstly. When the division into memory blocks in a unit of data line is employed, all memory cells of a selected block for writing arranged in line and having drains connected to a data line applied with a write high voltage suffer from data line disturbance. The data line disturbance is a phenomenon that for example, in a memory cell associated with a word line not rendered to be selected and a data line rendered to be selected for writing, an electric field between the source and drain is increased, so that hot holes are injected from drain to floating gate to decrease the threshold of the memory cell transistor. [0015]
  • A major object of the invention is to provide a microcomputer incorporating a flash memory which is easy to use. More particularly, a first object of the invention is to provide a microcomputer capable of making highly efficient a processing of initial write of information into the built-in flash memory. A second object of the invention is to improve rewrite efficiency of part of information held in some of memory blocks of the flash memory by eliminating wastefulness of write operation after simultaneous erasing of the memory blocks of interest. A third object of the invention is to improve rewrite efficiency by eliminating wasteful transfer operation, from the outside, of write information necessary for partial rewrite of a memory block. A fourth object of the invention is to change information held in the flash memory on real time base in synchronism with control operation by the microcomputer. [0016]
  • Further, the invention has for its object to provide a flash memory in which the minimum size of memory block obtained by using sources in common in an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory device can be decreased. Still another object is to prevent an erroneous operation due to data line disturbance in a unselected memory block for writing from occurring when formation of memory blocks is effected in a unit of word line. [0017]
  • Major aspects of the present invention will now be described. [0018]
  • More specifically, a microcomputer comprises, on a single semiconductor chip, a central processing unit and a nonvolatile flash memory in which information to be processed by the central processing unit is rewritable by electrical erase and write, and the microcomputer is provided with an input terminal of an operation mode signal for designating a first operation mode in which rewrite of the flash memory is controlled by a circuit built in the semiconductor chip and a second operation mode in which it is controlled by a unit provided externally of the semiconductor chip. [0019]
  • When the central processing unit performs rewrite control in accordance with designation of the first operation mode, a rewrite control program to be executed by the central processing unit may be held in a mask ROM or a rewrite control program precedently stored in the flash memory may be transferred to a RAM and executed. [0020]
  • The fact that the amount of information to be stored in the flash memory in accordance with an application differs in accordance with the kind of the information such as for example a program, a data table or control data is taken into consideration. Then, in order that upon rewrite of part of information held in some of memory blocks of the flash memory, efficiency of rewrite can be improved by eliminating wastefulness of write operation after simultaneous erasing of the memory blocks of interest, a plurality of memory blocks having mutually different storage capacities may be allotted each for a simultaneously erasable unit in the flash memory. [0021]
  • When rewrite of the flash memory is controlled internally and externally of the microcomputer, in order for a memory block to be erased simultaneously can be designated easily, a register in which information for designating the memory block to be erased simultaneously is rewritably held may be incorporated in the flash memory. [0022]
  • When the built-in flash memory has, as a simultaneous erase unit, a plurality of memory blocks having mutually different storage capacities, in order that the built-in RAM can be utilized as a working area or a data buffer area for rewrite of memory block, a memory block having a storage capacity set to be smaller than that of the built-in RAM may be provided. In this case, for the sake of improving efficiency of rewrite by eliminating wastefulness of transfer operation, from the outside, of write information necessary for partial rewrite of the memory block, information held in the memory block having a storage capacity smaller than that of the built-in RAM may be transferred to the built-in RAM, all or part of the transferred information may be renewed on the RAM and the memory block of interest may be rewritten with renewed information. Further, upon tuning of data such as control data held in the flash memory, in order that information held in the flash memory can be changed on real time base in synchronism with control operation by the microcomputer, a processing may be effected wherein addresses of a specified area of the built-in RAM are controllably changed and arranged so as to overlap addresses of the memory block having the smaller storage capacity than the built-in RAM, that is, changed and arranged so that the overlapped RAM may be accessed when the memory block is accessed and after working has been done at the specified address, the arranged address of the RAM is restored to the original state and the contents of the memory block is rewritten with the information at the specified address of the RAM. [0023]
  • In order to decrease the minimum block size more easily as compared to the case where memory blocks are formed in a unit of data line, memory blocks are defined by connecting a common source line to memory cells having their control gates coupled to a single or a plurality of word lines in a unit of word line. [0024]
  • At that time, to take care of data line disturbance in an unselected memory block for writing, voltage output means is adopted which can control, in a unit of memory block, potential of the source line to first potential and to second potential of higher level than that of the first potential upon write operation, whereby the voltage output means applies the first potential to a source line of a memory block including memory cells having an associated data line and an associated word line applied with predetermined voltages so as to be selected for writing and applies the second potential to a source line of a memory block including memory cells having an associated data line applied with the predetermined voltage and an associated word line not applied with the predetermined voltage so as not to be selected for writing. [0025]
  • In order to improve ease of use in the formation of memory blocks in a unit of word line, a plurality of memory blocks include a single or a plurality of large memory blocks associated with a relatively large number of word lines and a single or a plurality of small memory blocks associated with a relatively small number of word lines. [0026]
  • At that time, in order to minimize the data line disturbance time, the large memory block and the small memory block have data lines in common and arranged separately in line, a selection circuit for selecting a data line upon write and read operations is arranged near the large memory block, a transfer gate circuit is inserted in data lines which are associated in common with the large memory block and small memory block, and a control circuit is provided which cuts off the transfer gate circuit upon write of the large memory block. [0027]
  • According to the above-mentioned aspects of the invention, when information is initially written into the flash memory in the phase preceding mounting of the microcomputer according to the invention, the information can be written efficiently under the control of the external write device such as a PROM writer by designating the second operation mode. [0028]
  • For example, programs, data tables or control data are written into the plurality of memory blocks having mutually different capacities and defined each as a simultaneously erasable unit, in accordance with a storage capacity of each memory block. [0029]
  • When the microcomputer is mounted on the system and thereafter the flash memory is rewritten, the first operation mode is designated to cause, for example, the central processing unit built in the microcomputer to execute control of rewrite. In this case, data of a relatively large information amount can be written in a memory block of a relatively large storage capacity and data of a relatively small information amount can be written in a memory block of a relatively small storage capacity. Namely, a memory block having a storage capacity meeting the information amount to be stored can be utilized. Accordingly, even when a given memory block is erased simultaneously for rewrite of part of information held in the flash memory, such wastefulness that an information group substantially not required to be rewritten is erased concurrently and thereafter written again can be prevented as far as possible. [0030]
  • Especially, when of the plurality of memory blocks, a memory block having a storage capacity set to be smaller than that of the built-in RAM is provided, this memory block may be utilized as a work area or a data buffer area for rewrite of memory block. More particularly, when the flash memory is rewritten with the microcomputer mounted, information in a memory block to be rewritten is transferred to the built-in RAM, only partial information to be rewritten is received from the outside and rewritten on the RAM and then the flash memory is rewritten, whereby transfer, from the outside, of information held internally in advance of rewrite and not required to be rewritten need not be repeated, so that wastefulness of information transfer for partial rewrite of the memory block can be eliminated. Further, in the flash memory, the time for simultaneously erasing a small memory block is not so short that the flash memory per se can be rewritten on real time base in synchronism with control operation by the microcomputer. But, by utilizing the built-in RAM as a work area or a data buffer area for rewrite of memory block, the same data as that rewritten on real time base can eventually be obtained in the memory block. [0031]
  • When memory blocks are defined each in a unit of word line, the minimum memory block has a storage capacity which corresponds to that of one word line, regardless of the number of parallel input/output bits. Contrary to this, when memory blocks are defined each in a unit of data line, the minimum memory block has a storage capacity corresponding to the number of data lines which in turn corresponds to the number of parallel input/output bits. This signifies that the storage capacity of the minimum memory block can be reduced more easily when memory blocks are defined in a unit of word line and especially in the case of a memory incorporated in the microcomputer wherein input/output of data is carried out in a unit of byte or word, the minimum size of memory block can be reduced drastically. This contributes to further improvement in ease of use of the flash memory built in the microcomputer and consequently improvement in efficiency of rewrite of small scale data in a unit of memory block. [0032]
  • In a region near the source side end of the drain of a nonvolatile memory device, electron and hole pairs are generated owing to a tunnel phenomenon between bands. In this case, when a relatively large electric field is generated between the source and drain, holes of the electron and hole pairs are accelerated by the electric field to turn into hot holes. The hot holes are injected to the floating gate through a tunnel insulating film. This state is referred to as data line disturbance and when the data line disturbance affects the device for a long time, the threshold of the memory device is decreased and there results an undesirable change of stored information which leads to an erroneous operation (data line disturbance fault) In an unselected block for writing, by applying second potential such as data line disturbance prevention voltage to a source line of a memory cell to raise source potential, an electric field between the drain and source is weakened, thereby ensuring that holes of electron and hole pairs generated near the drain can be prevented from turning into hot holes to prevent a decrease in the threshold of memory transistor. [0033]
  • For prevention of the data line disturbance fault, minimization of the data line disturbance time (the time for exposure to the data line disturbance state) is effective. In this case, the data line disturbance time affecting a small memory block owing to write concomitant with rewrite of a memory block having a large storage capacity is relatively increased in comparison with the converse case. In view of this fact, by adopting an arrangement in which with respect to an intervening transfer gate circuit, memory blocks on the side of a Y selection circuit are formed of large memory blocks and memory blocks on the opposite side are formed of small memory blocks, the data line disturbance time affecting memory cells of the memory blocks relatively near the Y selection circuit owing to write of the memory block relatively remote from the Y selection circuit can be reduced drastically as compared to the case of the converse arrangement of large memory blocks and small memory blocks. By virtue of this arrangement relation between the large memory blocks and small memory blocks, erroneous operation due to data line disturbance can further be suppressed. [0034]
  • According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a microcomputer comprising a central processing unit, an electrically rewritable flash memory, flash memory rewriting I/O port means capable of being coupled to a ROM writer for rewriting the flash memory, switch means located between the central processing unit and the flash memory, and a rewriting mode decision means responsive to an externally supplied operation mode signal for controlling the switch means and the flash memory rewriting I/O port means, the central processing unit, the flash memory, the flash memory I/O port means, the switching means and the rewriting mode decision means being formed in a single semiconductor chip. [0035]
  • According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided there is provided an electrically rewritable flash memory device comprising: [0036]
  • a memory cell array including a plurality of memory cells arranged in rows and columns, each of the memory cells including a non-volatile memory element having first and second semiconductor regions formed in a first surface portion of a semiconductor substrate, a floating gate formed over and insulated from a second surface portion of the semiconductor substrate between the the first and second semiconductor regions, and a control gate formed over and insulated from the floating gate; [0037]
  • a plurality of first conductors extending in parallel with one another in a row direction over the semiconductor substrate, control gates of memory cells in one row being connected in common to one first conductor; [0038]
  • a plurality of second conductors extending in parallel with one another in a column direction over the semiconductor substrate, first semiconductor regions of memory cells in one column being connected in common to one second conductor; [0039]
  • a plurality of common conductors extending in the row direction over the semiconductor substrate, second semiconductor regions of at least two rows of memory cells being connected in common to one common conductor such that the at least one row of memory cells having their second semiconductor regions connected in common to one common conductor form a memory block, memory blocks so formed having different memory capacities; [0040]
  • a plurality of common voltage control circuits formed in the substrate, one provided for each of the memory blocks, for generating a common voltage assuming at least first and second voltage values; and [0041]
  • a control circuit formed in the substrate for generating a control signal indicating which of the memory blocks is subjected to an erasing/writing operation, the control signal being supplied to the plurality of common voltage control circuits so that individual common voltage control circuits apply to their associated common conductors common voltages each having one of the first and second voltage values depending on the control signal to effect a writing operation with a common voltage of the second voltage value applied to a common conductor for a memory block which does not contain a memory cell selected for the writing operation and to effect a simultaneous erasing operation with a common voltage of the first voltage value applied to a common conductor for a memory block selected for a simultaneous erasing operation.[0042]
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of a microcomputer adopting an all over flash memory. [0043]
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of a microcomputer adopting a flash memory along with a mask ROM. [0044]
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram drawn from the viewpoint of rewrite of a flash memory by means of a general purpose PROM writer. [0045]
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram drawn from the viewpoint of rewrite of a flash memory based on CPU control. [0046]
  • FIG. 5 is a memory map showing an example of a microcomputer applied with an all over flash memory. [0047]
  • FIG. 6 is a memory map showing an example of a microcomputer having a flash memory along with a mask ROM. [0048]
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of the schematic control procedure of erase. [0049]
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining an example of the schematic control procedure of write. [0050]
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of an expedient to achieve rewrite of the flash memory on realtime base. [0051]
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a manner of making partial rewrite of a memory block of the flash memory efficient. [0052]
  • FIGS. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining the principle of the flash memory. [0053]
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the principle of construction of a memory cell array using memory transistors of FIGS. 11A and 11B. [0054]
  • FIG. 13 is a circuit block diagram showing an example of a flash memory in which a plurality of memory blocks are defined each in a unit of data line and having different storage capacities. [0055]
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of further details of a microcomputer corresponding to the microcomputer of FIG. 1. [0056]
  • FIG. 15 is a plan view showing the packaged state of the microcomputer of FIG. 14. [0057]
  • FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the whole of the flash memory incorporated in the microcomputer of FIG. 14. [0058]
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of division into memory blocks. [0059]
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining an example of a control register. [0060]
  • FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing an example of a memory read operation in the flash memory. [0061]
  • FIG. 20 is a timing chart showing an example of a memory write operation in the flash memory. [0062]
  • FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of details of the write control procedure. [0063]
  • FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of details of the erase control procedure. [0064]
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining another example of division into memory blocks. [0065]
  • FIG. 24 is a memory array portion configuration diagram showing an example of a flash memory in which a plurality of memory blocks are defined each in a unit of word line, having different capacities. [0066]
  • FIGS. 25A and 25B are diagrams for explaining an advantage of the embodiment shown in FIG. 24. [0067]
  • FIGS. 26A and 26B are diagrams for explaining an example of voltage conditions for countermeasures against data line disturbance in an unselected block for writing. [0068]
  • FIGS. 27A and 27B are diagrams for explaining the principle of generation of data line disturbance and countermeasures there against. [0069]
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining the change of threshold of a memory cell with respect to data line disturbance time. [0070]
  • FIG. 29 is a circuit diagram for explaining the correlation of data line disturbance time between memory blocks of small storage capacities and memory blocks of large storage capacities. [0071]
  • FIGS. 30A and 30B are diagrams showing an embodiment of a memory array in which a transfer gate circuit for selectively separating data lines is interposed between memory blocks. [0072]
  • FIG. 31 in an explanatory diagram in which an example of voltage conditions for countermeasures against data line disturbance is summed up. [0073]
  • FIG. 32 is a circuit diagram showing an example wherein a dummy word line is arranged between a memory block and a transfer gate. [0074]
  • FIG. 33 is a circuit diagram showing another example wherein a dummy word line is arranged between a memory block and a transfer gate circuit. [0075]
  • FIG. 34 is a circuit diagram showing still another example wherein a dummy word line is arranged between a memory block and a transfer gate circuit. [0076]
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining a memory array in which two memory blocks are arranged on each side of a transfer gate circuit. [0077]
  • FIG. 36 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a memory array in which the number of word lines of simultaneously erasable memory blocks is increased sequentially. [0078]
  • FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining an example of a memory array in which a transfer gate circuit is arranged between a group of large memory blocks and a group of small memory blocks. [0079]
  • FIG. 38 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a memory array in which the data line structure is constructed of main data lines and subsidiary data lines. [0080]
  • FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining an example in which simultaneously erasable memory blocks are arranged on the left and right sides of an X address decoder. [0081]
  • FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining an example of a control circuit in FIG. 39. [0082]
  • FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment in which redundant words are provided in a memory block. [0083]
  • FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment in which memory blocks dedicated to redundancy are provided. [0084]
  • FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment in which some memory blocks are formed into one-time programmable areas. [0085]
  • FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment in which some memory blocks are formed into mask ROM's. [0086]
  • FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining an example of a layout pattern of memory blocks. [0087]
  • FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining a layout pattern in which transfer gate MOS transistors are provided between memory blocks. [0088]
  • FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining a pattern in which the drain of a dummy cell is floating in contrast to the configuration of FIG. 46. [0089]
  • FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining a layout pattern in which transfer MOS transistors are substantially increased in size. [0090]
  • FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of the whole of a flash memory applied with pluralization of memory blocks in a unit of word line and countermeasures against data line disturbance. [0091]
  • FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing details of a control circuit included in the flash memory of FIG. 49. [0092]
  • FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining details of a power supply circuit included in the flash memory of FIG. 49. [0093]
  • FIG. 52 is a waveform diagram showing output voltages generated from the power supply circuit of FIG. 51. [0094]
  • FIGS. 53A and 53B are diagrams for explaining details of an X address decoder included in the flash memory of FIG. 49. [0095]
  • FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining details of an example of an erase circuit included in the flash memory of FIG. 49. [0096]
  • FIG. 55 is an operational timing chart of the erase circuit of FIG. 54. [0097]
  • FIG. 56 is a timing chart of a series of operations related to erase in the flash memory shown in FIG. 49. [0098]
  • FIG. 57 is a timing chart of a series of operations related to write in the flash memory shown in FIG. 49. [0099]
  • FIGS. 58A to [0100] 58I are longitudinal sectional views of a device at various stages of the production processes of various transistors for constituting the flash memory or the microcomputer incorporating the same.
  • FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining techniques of erasing the flash memory. [0101]
  • FIG. 60 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining a semiconductor substrate/well structure corresponding to sector erase. [0102]
  • FIG. 61 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining another semiconductor substrate/well structure. [0103]
  • FIG. 62 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining still another semiconductor substrate/well structure corresponding to sector erase. [0104]
  • FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating an overlap of a specified address area of the random access memory with a predetermined address area of the flash memory. [0105]
  • FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of a RAM control register. [0106]
  • FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an address setting for a specified address area of the random access memory. [0107]
  • FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of a chip select controller.[0108]
  • DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
  • Embodiments of the present invention will be described in sequence of the following items. [0109]
  • [1] A microcomputer adopting an allover flash memory. [0110]
  • [2] A microcomputer adopting a mask ROM and a flash memory [0111]
  • [3] write of information by means of a general purpose PROM writer [0112]
  • [4] A write control program under the control of a CPU [0113]
  • [5] Proper use of write by the general purpose PROM writer or write by the CPU control [0114]
  • [6] Expedient to achieve rewrite on real time base [0115]
  • [7] Making partial rewrite of a memory block efficient [0116]
  • [8] The principle of the flash memory [0117]
  • [9] Formation of a plurality of memory blocks having different storage capacities and defined each in a unit of data line [0118]
  • [10] Details of a microcomputer corresponding to FIG. 1 [0119]
  • [11] A control circuit for rewrite of flash memory FMRY [0120]
  • [12] Details of the rewrite control procedure of the flash memory FMRY [0121]
  • [13] Formation of a plurality of memory blocks having different storage capacities and defined each in a unit of word line [0122]
  • [14] Countermeasures against data line disturbance in an unselected block for writing [0123]
  • [15] Correlation of data line disturbance time between memory blocks [0124]
  • [16] A transfer gate circuit for data line separation [0125]
  • [17] Dummy word lines [0126]
  • [18] Various forms of pluralization of memory blocks in a unit of word line [0127]
  • [19] Layout configuration of memory blocks [0128]
  • [20] The whole of a flash memory applied with countermeasurements against data line disturbance [0129]
  • [21] A method for production of a flash memory [0130]
  • [22] A semiconductor substrate/well structure meeting sector erase [0131]
  • [1] A Microcomputer Adopting an Allover Flash Memory [0132]
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of a microcomputer adopting an allover flash memory (the whole of the ROM in the microcomputer being in the form of a flash memory). In a microcomputer MCU shown in the figure, a central processing unit CPU, a nonvolatile flash memory FMRY in which information to be processed by the central processing unit CPU is rewritable by electrical erase and write, peripheral circuits such as timer TMR, serial communication interface SCI, random access memory RAM and input/output circuit I/O, and a control circuit CONT are formed on a single semiconductor chip CHP such as silicon through known semiconductor integrated circuit production techniques. In the flash memory FMRY, information is rewritable by electrical erase and write and like an EPROM, its memory cell can be constructed of a single transistor; and besides it has the function of electrically erasing all memory cells simultaneously or a block of memory cells (a memory block) simultaneously. The flash memory FMRY has a plurality of memory blocks each defined as a simultaneously erasable unit. In FIG. 1, LMB designates a large memory block having a relatively large storage capacity and SMB represents a small memory block having a relatively small storage capacity. The storage memory of the small memory block SMB is designed to be not larger than that of the random access memory RAM. Accordingly, the random access memory RAM can receive data transfer from the small memory block SMB to hold the information temporarily and can be used as a work area or data buffer area for rewriting. Requisite data and programs are written in the flash memory FMRY. Details of the flash memory FMRY will be described later. [0133]
  • The flash memory FMRY is allowed to rewrite its storage information under the control of the central processing unit CPU or under the control of a unit externally of the semiconductor chip CHP such as a general purpose PROM writer while the microcomputer MCU is mounted on a system. In the figure, MODE denotes an operation mode signal for selectively designating a first operation mode which causes the central processing unit to control rewrite of the flash memory FMRY and a second operation mode which causes the external unit to control rewrite of the flash memory FRMY and the operation mode signal is applied to a mode signal input terminal P mode on the semiconductor chip CHP. [0134]
  • [2] A Microcomputer Adopting a Mask ROM and a Flash Memory [0135]
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of a microcomputer adopting a mask ROM along with a flash memory. In microcomputer MCU shown in the figure, part of the flash memory FMRY of FIG. 1 is replaced with a mask read only memory MASKROM. Held in the mask read only memory MASKROM are data and programs which need not be rewritten. A flash memory FMRY shown in FIG. 2 has a plurality of small memory blocks SMB each defined as a simultaneously erasable unit. [0136]
  • [3] Write of Information by Means of a General Purpose PROM Writer [0137]
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram drawn from the viewpoint of rewrite of a flash memory FMRY by means of a general purpose PROM writer. In the figure, as an example of the mode signal MODE, MD[0138] 0, MD1 and MD2 are indicated. The mode signals MD0 to MD2 are supplied to a control circuit CONT. A decoder included in the control circuit CONT, though not limitedly, decodes the mode signals MD0 to MD2 and decides whether an operation mode which does not require write into the flash memory FMRY is designated or whether the first operation mode or the second operation mode is designated. At that time, if designation of the second operation mode is determined, the control circuit CONT performs control such that it designates I/O ports which are to interface with the general purpose PROM writer PRW and permits the external general purpose PROM writer PRW to directly access the built-in flash memory FMRY. More specifically, an I/O port PORTdata for performing input/output of data between the writer and the flash memory FMRY, an I/O port PORTaddr for supplying address signals to the flash memory FMRY and an I/O port PORTcont for supplying various kinds of control signals to the flash memory FMRY are designated. In addition, the control circuit CONT suppresses substantial operation of built-in function blocks having no direct relation to rewrite control by means of the general purpose PROM writer PRW, such as the central processing unit CPU, random access memory RAM and mask read only memory MASKROM. For example, connection of such a built-in function block as the central processing unit CPU to the flash memory FMRY is disconnected through switch means SWITCH respectively arranged in data bus DBUS and address bus ABUS, as exemplified in FIG. 3. The switch means SWITCH can also be grasped as tristate type output circuits arranged in a circuit for delivering data from the built-in function block such as the CPU to the data bus DBUS and in a circuit for delivering addresses to the address bus ABUS. Such tristate output circuits are controlled such that they are brought into high impedance condition in response to the second operation mode. In the example of FIG. 3, the built-in function blocks not being directly related to the rewrite control based on the general purpose PROM writer, such as the central processing unit CPU, random access memory RAM and mask read only memory MASKROM, are brought into a low power consumption mode by a standby signal STBY* (sign* means that a signal assigned with this sign is a low active signal). If in a low power consumption mode the tristate output circuits are so controlled as to be brought into high output impedance condition, then the power consumption mode may be set to those function blocks in response to designation of the second operation mode by means of the mode signals MD0 to MD2 to substantially suppress operation of the built-in function blocks not having direct relation to the rewrite control based on the general purpose PROM writer PRW, such as the CPU, RAM and ROM.
  • When the second operation mode is set, the I/O ports PORTdata, PORTaddr and PORTcont of the microcomputer MCU couple to the general purpose PROM writer PRW through a conversion socket SOCKET. The conversion socket SOCKET has on the one hand a terminal arrangement adapted for the I/O ports PORTdata, PORTaddr and PORTcont and on the other hand a terminal arrangement adapted for a standard memory, terminals of one terminal arrangement having the same functions as those of terminals of the other terminal arrangement being connected mutually inside the conversion socket SOCKET. [0139]
  • [4] A Write Control Program Under the Control of a CPU [0140]
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram drawn from the viewpoint of rewrite of a flash memory based on CPU control. In the microcomputer MCU of FIG. 1, a rewrite control program to be executed by the central processing unit CPU has precedently been written in the flash memory FMRY by means of the general purpose PROM writer PRW. In the microcomputer MCU of FIG. 2, a rewrite control program to be executed by the central processing unit CPU can be held in the mask read only memory MASKROM. When the first operation mode is designated by the mode signals MD[0141] 0 to MD2 and a decoder included in the control circuit CONT recognizes this designation, the central processing unit CPU carries out write of data into the flash memory FMRY in accordance with a write control program written in the flash memory FMRY in advance or the rewrite control program held in the mask read only memory MASKROM.
  • FIG. 5 shows a memory map of the microcomputer having the allover flash memory (see FIG. 1). In the figure, a rewrite control program and a transfer control program have precedently been written in predetermined areas of the flash memory. When the first operation mode is designated, the central processing unit CPU executes the transfer control program to transfer the rewrite control program to the randam access memory RAM. After completion of the transfer, the processing of the central processing unit CPU branches to execution of the rewrite control program on the random access memory RAM and through this, the erase and write (inclusive of verification) of the flash memory FMRY is repeated. [0142]
  • FIG. 6 shows a memory map of the microcomputer having the mask ROM along with the flash memory (see FIG. 2). In this case, the transfer program as explained with reference to FIG. 5 is unneeded. When the first operation mode is designated, the central processing unit CPU sequentially executes a rewrite control program held in the mask read only memory MASKROM to thereby repeat erase and write of the flash memory FMRY. [0143]
  • FIG. 7 shows an example of the control procedure of erase by the central processing unit CPU. Firstly, in accordance with the rewrite control program, the central processing unit CPU performs pre-write of memory cells present within an address range to be erased ([0144] steps 71 to 74). Through this, states of the memory cells before erase are all uniformed to written states. Subsequently, memory cells standing for objects to be erased are erased little by little while verifying the degree of erase each time erase is completed (erase/verify) in order to prevent excessive erase, thus completing an erase operation (steps 75 to 79). Erase by means of the general purpose PROM writer PRW can be done in a similar way. Erase sequence for the flash memory will be detailed hereinafter with reference to FIG. 22.
  • FIG. 8 shows an example of the control procedure of write by the central processing unit CPU. Firstly, the central processing unit CPU sets a write start address of the flash memory FMRY (step [0145] 81). Subsequently, data transmitted from the outside is read through peripheral circuits designated by the rewrite control program, for example, the serial communication interface SCI or I/O ports (step 82). The thus read data is written into the flash memory FMRY for a predetermined time (step 83) and the written data is read to verify whether the data is written normally (write/verify) (step 84). Thereafter, the above read, write and verify of data are repeated until they are completed for a write end address (steps 85 and 86). Write by means of the general purpose PROM writer can be done in a similar way. In this case, however, data to be written is supplied from the PROM writer PRW through predetermined ports. Write sequence for the flash memory will be detailed later with reference to FIG. 21.
  • [5] Proper Use of Write by the General Purpose PROM Writer or Write by the CPU Control [0146]
  • Principally, write by the general purpose PROM writer is applied to write of initial data or an initial program used before on-board of the microcomputer MCU, that is, mounting of the microcomputer MCU into a system. This can ensure that a relatively large amount of information can be written efficiently. [0147]
  • Write based on the CPU control is applied to the case where tuning of data is carried out while operating the system on which the microcomputer MCU is mounted (called a mounting machine) or the case where changes of data and programs under condition that the microcomputer MCU is mounted on the system (on-board condition), such as bug countermeasures for programs or changes of programs concomitant with version-up of the system, are needed. Through this, the flash memory FMRY can be rewritten without removing the microcomputer MCU from the mounting system. [0148]
  • [6] Expedient to Achieve Rewrite on Real Time Base [0149]
  • FIG. 9 shows an example of a technique of expedient to rewrite the flash memory on real time base. In the flash memory, because of its storage formatting, time required for erase cannot be reduced even when the storage capacity of a memory block defined as a simultaneous erasing unit is made to be small and it amounts up to, for example, several of tens of milliseconds to several of seconds. This makes it difficult to perform tuning of data by rewriting control data held in the flash memory on real time base while operating the system with the microcomputer MCU mounted thereon. To cope with this problem, the built-in RAM is utilized as a work area or data buffer area for rewrite of memory block. [0150]
  • More particularly, data of a predetermined small memory block SMB holding data to be subjected to tuning is first transferred to a specified address area of the random access memory RAM. [0151]
  • Next, the microcomputer MCU is switched to a flash memory write mode of operation. This write operation mode is set either by setting MD[0152] 0 to MD2 for a predetermined value or by setting the rewrite high voltage Vpp to be applied to an external terminal to a predetermined rewrite high voltage. This write mode indicates that the flash memory FMRY is in a state in which it can be written by the CPU and does not indicate that the CPU is writing the flash memory.
  • Subsequently, a specified address area of the random access memory RAM is overlapped with an address of a part of the predetermined small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY (step [0153] 91).
  • The reasons why a specified address area of the random access memory RAM is overlapped with an address area of a predetermined small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY are as follows. Namely, when the flash memory FMRY stores a user program (e.g., an engine control program) and user data (e.g., engine control data), the user data are read out by the CPU in the course of execution of the user program to thereby effect engine control on the basis of the read out data. Thus, the user program contains addresses of a storage area of the flash memory FMRY in which the user data are stored. Therefore, in order to change the user data (i.e., in order to effect the user data tuning) without converting the user program, that is, without rewriting the addresses of the user data contained in the user program, it is necessary, for example, to change the address location of a specified address area of the random access memory RAM in such a manner that the specified address area of the random access memory RAM can be considered, when viewed in the address space of the CPU, as being the same as a predetermined address area of the flash memory FMRY in which the user data to be subjected to tuning are stored. [0154]
  • In other words, for tuning of user data, the addresses of the specified address area of the random access memory RAM are changed to the addresses of an area of the flash memory FMRY in which the user data to be subjected to tuning are stored. When the CPU executing the user program accesses the user data (data being subjected to tuning) in the flash memory FMRY, actually, the flash memory is not accessed but the specified area of the random access memory RAM is accessed. [0155]
  • FIG. 63 is a diagrammatic representation of overlap of the specified address area of the random access memory RAM with the predetermined address area of the flash memory FMRY. [0156]
  • For example, as shown in FIG. 63, the address space of the flash memory FMRY is represented to be between hexadecimal addresses ED00 and EE7F, and the address space of the random access memory RAM (built-in RAM area) is represented to be between hexadecimal addresses F680 and FE7F. In this figure, “H′” indicates that the addresses are in a hexadecimal representation. [0157]
  • The specified address area (SRA) of the random access memory RAM is, for example, a 128 byte-area having addresses from H′F680 to H′F6FF. When user data tuning is carried out, the addresses of the specified address area (SRA) are, in FIG. 63, overlapped with addresses H′ECOO to H′EC7E of a part of the address area (H′ECOO to H′ECFF) of the small memory block SMB within the address space of the flash memory FMRY. [0158]
  • Such a change of address arrangement can be realized by making the decode logic of the random access memory RAM switchable in response to a predetermined control bit or setting of a flag. [0159]
  • Namely, the chip select controller CSCONT shown in FIG. 14 has a RAM control register RAMCR as shown in FIG. 64. This register is an eight bit register which is readable and writable from the CPU and in which each of [0160] bits 3 to 0 has an initial value “0” and each of the bits 7 to 4 has an initial value “1”. The bits 3 to 0 are made valid when the microcomputer MCU is in a write operation mode. Here, the initial values are those set in the register at the time when the microcomputer is reset.
  • The bit [0161] 3 (RAMS) of the RAM control register RAMCR determines it how the specified address area SRA of the random access memory RAM is utilized, i.e., whether the specified address area SRA of the random access memory is utilized as having its original addresses or as having addresses overlapped with those of a part of the address area of the small address block SMB of the flash memory FMRY.
  • FIG. 65 illustrates how to set addresses of the specified address area SRA by use of the RAM control register RAMCR. When the RAMS bit is reset to “0”, the specified address area SRA is utilized as having its original addresses H′F680 to H′F6FF of the random access memory RAM, while when the RAMS bit is set to “1” with the microcomputer CPU being under write operation mode, the specified address area SRA is utilized as being overlapped with the addresses of a part of the small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY. [0162]
  • Bit [0163] 2 (RAM2) to bit 0 (RAM0) of the RAM control register RAMCR serve to determine it where in the small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY the addresses of the specified area SRA should be overlapped with. When the RAMS bit is reset (cleared) to “0”, the values of the bits 2 to 0 are of no significance. Meanwhile, when the RAMS bit is set to “1”, the addresses of the specified area SRA are variable depending on the values of the bits 2 to 0.
  • Namely, the addresses of the specified area SRA are: [0164]
  • H′EC00 to H′EC7F for [0165] bits 2 to 0 being “0”, “0”, “0”,
  • H′EC80 to H′ECFF for [0166] bits 2 to 0 being “0”, “0”, “1”,
  • H′ED00 to H′ED7F for [0167] bits 2 to 0 being “0”, “1”, “0”,
  • H′ED80 to H′EDFF for [0168] bits 2 to 0 being “0”, “1”, “1” and
  • H′EE00 to H′EE7F for [0169] bits 2 to 0 being “1”, “0”, “0”.
  • Then, tuning of control data is carried out using the specified address area SRA of the random access memory RAM which is overlapped with the address of the predetermined memory block. [0170]
  • After completion of tuning (step [0171] 92), the address overlapping of the random access memory RAM and memory block SMB is released, so that the address arrangement of the random access memory RAM restores its original state (step 93). Namely, the value of the RAMS bit of the RAM control register RAMCR is changed by the CPU from “1” (set state) to “0” (reset or cleared state).
  • Finally, data having been subjected to tuning which is held in the the specified address area SRA of the random access memory RAM is written by the CPU into the predetermined address area of the memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY (step [0172] 94).
  • This writing operation is performed by executing the write control program stored in the flash memory FMRY. Namely, data in the small memory block of the flash memory FMRY which data are to be changed or tuned are erased in accordance with the steps of the erase flow chart, as will be later described in detail with reference to FIG. 22. Thereafter, the data having been transferred to the random access memory RAM and having been subjected to the tuning are written by the CPU into the small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY (the data being written in the whole of the the small memory block SMB). In other words, the scheme which will be next described in “[7] Making partial rewrite of a memory block efficient” is employed. [0173]
  • Through this, the same data as control data held in the flash memory which has been rewritten on real time base can eventually be set in or obtained on the memory block SMB while operating the system with the microcomputer MCU mounted thereon. [0174]
  • Subsequently, the microcomputer MCU is switched from the flash memory write operation mode to the normal operation mode by resetting the mode signal MD[0175] 0 to MD2 or by resetting the rewrite high voltage Vpp to be applied to the external terminal of the microcomputer to 0 volt. FIG. 66 shows an example of a circuit structure of a part of the chip select controller CSCONT in which a RAM address decoder RADE and a flash address decoder FADE are coupled to address bus lines L15 to L7 for the higher bits 15 to 7 of the inner address bus (bit 15 to 0) to decode the address signal on the address bus lines L15 to L7. For example, if the address signal on the lines L15 to L7 represents an address area of the random access memory RAM, the RAM address decoder RADE decodes the signal and makes its output signal RADES high. Meanwhile, if the address signal on the lines L15 to L7 represents an address area of the flash memory FMRY, the flash address decoder FADE decodes the signal and makes its output signal FADES high.
  • In FIG. 66, the logic circuit OCC other than the RAM address decoder RADE and the flash address decoder FADE serves as means for overlapping the addresses of the predetermined address area of the flash memory FMRY (a part of the small memory block SMB) with addresses of the specified address area of the random access memory RAM, as described above. The RAMS and RAM[0176] 2 to RAM0 correspond to those of the RAM control register RAMCR described above with reference to FIG. 64.
  • A specific operation of the circuit shown in FIG. 66 is considered to be readily understood by those skilled in the art and will not be described in detail. With the RAMS bit value being made “1”, when the addresses of the predetermined address area of the flash memory FMRY (the addresses overlapped with the addresses of the specified address area SRA of the random access memory RAM) are accessed under the conditions in which the values of RAM[0177] 2 to RAM0 are made to correspond to one of states (2) to (6) shown in FIG. 65, a detection at a low level indicating that the overlap designation area is accessed appears on a point NOD in FIG. 66. As a result, flash memory select signal MS-FLN* is brought into a high level non-active state and RAM selection signal MS-RAMN* is brought into a low level active state so that the address signal for otherwise accessing the small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY now serves to access the specified address area SRA of the random access memory RAM without accessing the small memory block SMB of the flash memory FMRY.
  • On the other hand, with the RAMS bit value being set to “1”, when the address signal on the address lines L[0178] 15 to L7 indicates an address other than one of the addresses of address areas of the flash memory FMRY represented by bits RAM2 to RAM0 of the RAM control register RAMCR (i.e., other than the address area of one of the addresses represented by one of states (2) to (6) shown in FIG. 65), the detection signal on the node NOD is brought into a high level. As a result, when the address signal on the address bus lines indicates the flash memory FMRY, the flash memory selection signal MS-FLN* is brought into a low level active state so that data is read into the CPU from an address area of the flash memory FMRY specified by the address signal on the address bus lines, while when the address signal on the address bus lines indicates the random access memory RAM, the RAM selection signal MS-RAMN* is brought into a low level active state so that an address area of the random access memory RAM specified by the address signal on the address bus lines is accessed by the CPU for data reading therefrom or data writing thereinto.
  • [7] Making Partial Rewrite of a Memory Block Efficient [0179]
  • FIG. 10 shows an example of a technique of making partial rewrite of a memory block of the flash memory efficient. When part of information held in a predetermined memory block of the flash memory is rewritten upon modification of a bug of a program or version-up of the program, information held in the memory block having a smaller storage capacity than that of the RAM is transferred to the built-in RAM (step [0180] 101), part of the transferred information is renewed on the RAM (step 102), and after the data in the memory block in question is erased (step 103), the memory block in is rewritten with the renewed information (step 104). Through this, even when one of the memory blocks SMB is erased simultaneously, information held in that memory block SMB can be preserved. Therefore, by receiving only data to be rewritten from the outside and rewriting the data on the RAM, transfer, from the outside, of information not required to be rewritten and held in the flash memory FMRY before rewriting can be unneeded, thus avoiding wastefulness of information transfer for partial rewrite of the memory block. The above description with reference to FIG. 10 will be clear also from the description with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 made hereinbefore.
  • [8] The Principle of the Flash Memory [0181]
  • FIGS. 11A and 11B show the principle of the flash memory. A memory cell exemplified in FIG. 11A is constructed of an insulated gate field effect transistor having a two-layer gate structure. In the figure, [0182] 1 designates a P type silicon substrate, 14 a P type semiconductor region formed in the silicon substrate 1, 13 an N type semiconductor region and 15 and N type semiconductor region of low concentration. Denoted by 8 is a floating gate formed over the P type silicon substrate 1 through a thin oxide film 7 (for example, having a thickness of 10 nm) serving as a tunnel insulating film and by 11 is a control gate formed over the floating gate 8 through an oxide film 9. A source is formed of 13 and 15 and a drain is formed of 13 and 14. Information stored in this memory cell is substantially held as a change in threshold voltage in the transistor. Described hereinafter is the case where a transistor used in the memory cell to store information (hereinafter referred to as a memory transistor) is of N channel type, except otherwise described.
  • A write operation of information to the memory cell can be realized by, applying high voltages to, for example, the [0183] control gate 11 and drain so that electrons may be injected from the drain side to the floating gate 8 through avalanche injection. As a result of the write operation, the memory transistor assumes a threshold voltage as viewed from its control gate 7 which is raised as shown in FIG. 11B in comparison with that of the memory transistor without subjected to a write operation and so placed in the erase condition.
  • On the other hand, an erase operation can be realized by applying a high voltage to, for example, the source so that electrons may be drawn out of the floating [0184] gate 8 to the source side through tunnel phenomenon. As a result of the erase operation, the memory transistor assumes a threshold voltage as viewed from its control gate 11 which is lowered as shown in FIG. 11B. The threshold of the memory transistor shown in FIG. 11B is set to a positive voltage level in both of the write condition and erase condition. In other words, in relation to a word line selection level applied from a word line to the control gate 11, the threshold voltage for write condition is set to be higher and the threshold voltage for erase condition is set to be lower. Thanks to the fact that both the threshold voltages are related to the word line selection level in a manner described as above, a memory cell can be constructed of a single transistor without employing a selection transistor. When stored information is to be erased electrically, erase of the stored information can be done by drawing electrons stored in the floating gate 8 to the source electrode and therefore, by keeping the erase operation continuing for a relatively long time, electrons which are larger in amount than electrons injected in the floating gate 8 upon a write operation are drawn out. Thus, when electrical erase keeps continuing for a relatively long time, resulting in excessive erase, the threshold voltage of the memory transistor assumes, for example, a negative level and there occurs such inconvenience that a word line is selected even when the word line is at an unselection level. Write can also be effected by utilizing tunnel current as in the case of erase.
  • In a read operation, to prevent the memory cell from being written weakly, that is, to prevent the floating [0185] gate 8 from being injected with undesired carriers, voltages applied to the drain and control gate 11 are limited to relatively low values. For example, a low voltage of about 1V is applied to the drain and a low voltage of about 5V is applied to the control gate 11. Under the application of these voltages, the magnitude of a channel current flowing through the memory transistor is detected so as to decide whether information stored in the memory cell is “0” or “1”.
  • FIG. 12 shows the principle of construction of a memory cell array using the memory transistors. In the figure, four memory transistors (memory cells) Q[0186] 1 to Q4 are typically depicted. In the memory cells arranged in matrix in X and Y directions, control gates (gates for selection of memory cells) of memory transistors Q1 and Q2 (Q3 and Q4) arranged on the same row are connected to a corresponding word line WL1 (WL2), and drain regions (input/output nodes of memory cells) of memory transistors Q1 and Q3 (Q2 and Q4) are connected to a corresponding data line DL1 (DL2). Source regions of the memory transistors Q1 and Q3 (Q2 and Q4) are coupled to a source line SL1 (SL2).
  • Table 1 shows an example of voltage conditions for erase operation and write operations of memory cells. [0187]
    TABLE 1
    selection/
    memory element unselection source drain gate
    Writing
    Q1 selection 0 V 6 V 12 V 
    Q2 unselection 0 V 0 V 12 V 
    Q3 unselection 0 V 6 V 0 V
    Q4 unselection 0 V 0 V 0 V
    Erasing (positive voltage scheme)
    Q1, Q3 selection 12 V  0 V 0 V
    Q2, Q4 unselection 0 V 0 V 0 V
    Erasing (negative voltage scheme)
    Q1, Q2 selection 5 V 0 V −10 V   
    Q3, Q4 unselection 5 V 0 V 0 V
  • In this table, memory elements mean memory cells and gates mean control gates serving as selection gates of the memory cells. In erase based on a negative voltage scheme shown in the figure, a negative voltage of, for example, −10 V is applied to the control gate to form a high electric field necessary for erase. As is clear from the voltage conditions exemplified in the figure, in erase based on a positive voltage scheme, memory cells at least sources of which are connected in common can be erased collectively. Accordingly, with the source lines SL[0188] 1 and SL2 connected together in the construction of FIG. 12, the four memory cells Q1 to Q4 can be erased simultaneously. In this case, by changing the number of memory bits connected to the same source line, the size of memory block can be set desirably. As for the source line division scheme, in addition to a typical instance shown in FIG. 12 where the data line is defined as a unit (a common source line is so laid as to extend in the data line direction), there is available an instance where the word line is defined as a unit (a common source line is so laid as to extend in the word line direction). On the other hand, in erase based on the negative voltage scheme, memory cells having control gates connected in common can be erased simultaneously.
  • [9] Formation of a Plurality of Memory Blocks Having Different Storage Capacities and Defined Each in a Unit of Data Line [0189]
  • FIG. 13 is a circuit block diagram showing an example of a flash memory in which storage capacities of simultaneously erasable memory blocks are made to be different. [0190]
  • The flash memory FMRY shown in the figure has data input/output terminals D[0191] 0 to D7 of 8 bits, so that memory array portions ARY0 to ARY7 are provided in association with the respective data input/output terminals. Each of the memory array portions ARY0 to ARY7 is divided into two of a memory block LMB having a relatively large storage capacity and a memory block SMB having a relatively small storage capacity. In the figure, details of the memory array portion ARY0 are typically illustrated and the other memory array portions ARY1 to ARY7 are constructed similarly.
  • In each of the memory array portions ARY[0192] 0 to ARY7, memory cells MC formed of insulated gate field effect transistors of two-layer gate structure as explained previously in connection with FIG. 11 are arranged in matrix. Also, in the figure, WL0 to WLn designate word lines which are common to all of the memory array portions ARY0 to ARY7. Control gates of memory cells arranged on the same row are connected to a corresponding word line. In each of the memory array portions ARY0 to ARY7, drain regions of memory cells MC arranged on the same column are connected to a corresponding data line DL0, . . . or DL7. Source regions of memory cells MC constituting the memory block SMB are connected in common to a source line SL1 and source regions of memory cells MC constituting the memory block LMB are connected in common to a source line SL2.
  • A high voltage Vpp used for erase is supplied from voltage output circuits VOUT[0193] 1 and VOUT2 to the source lines SL1 and SL2. An output operation of the voltage output circuits VOUT1 and VOUT2 is selected in accordance with values of bits B1 and B2 of an erase block designation register. For example, by setting “1” to the bit B1 of the erase block designation register, only the memory block SMB of each of the memory array portions ARY0 to ARY7 is allowed to be erased simultaneously. When “1” is set to the bit B2 of the erase block designation register, only the memory block LMB of each of the memory array portions ARY0 to ARY7 is allowed to be erased simultaneously. When “1” is set to both the bits B1 and B2, the whole of the flash memory is allowed to be erased simultaneously.
  • Selection of the word line WL[0194] 0, . . . or WLn is effected by causing a row address decoder XADEC to decode a row address signal AX fetched in through a row address buffer XABUFF and a row address latch XALAT. A word driver WDRV selects a word line on the basis of a selection signal delivered out of the row address decoder XADEC. In a data read operation, the word driver WDRV is operated with a power supply as represented by voltage Vcc such as 5 V and earth potential such as 0 V fed from a voltage selection circuit VSEL, and it drives a word line to be selected to a selection level by the voltage Vcc and maintains a word line not to be selected at an unselection level such as earth potential. In a data write operation, the word driver WDRV is operated with a power supply as represented by voltage Vpp such as 12 V and earth potential such as 0 V fed from the voltage selection circuit VSEL and it drives a word line to be selected to a write high voltage level such as 12 V. In a data erase operation, the output of the word driver WDRV is rendered to be a low voltage level such as 0 V.
  • In each of the memory array portions ARY[0195] 0 to ARY7, the data lines DL0 to DL7 are connected in common to a common data line CD through column selection switches YS0 to YS7. Switching control of the column selection switches YS0 to YS7 is carried out by causing a column address decoder YADEC to decode a column address signal AY fetched in through a column address buffer YABUFF and a column address latch YALAT. An output selection signal of the column address decoder YADEC is fed in common to all of the memory array portions ARY0 to ARY7. Accordingly, when any one of the output selection signals of the column address decoder YADEC is rendered to be a selection level, a single data line is brought into connection to the common data line CD in each of the memory array portions ARY0 to ARY7.
  • Data read from a memory cell MC to the common data line is applied to a sense amplifier SAMP through a selection switch RS and the amplified data is delivered to the outside through a data output latch DOLAT and a data output buffer DOBUFF. The selection switch RS is set to a selection level in synchronism with a read operation. Write data fed from the outside is held in a data input latch circuit DILAT through a data input buffer DIBUFF. When data stored in the data input latch circuit DILAT is “0”, a write circuit WRIT supplies a write high voltage to the common data line CD through a selection switch WS. This write high voltage is fed to the drain of a memory cell, whose control gate is applied with the high voltage under the direction of a row address signal AX, through a data line selected by a column address signal AY, so that write into the memory cell in question is carried out. The selection switch WS is set to a selection level in synchronism with a write operation. Various timings for write and erase and voltage selection control signals are generated by a write/erase control circuit WECONT. [0196]
  • [10] Details of a Microcomputer Corresponding to FIG. 1 [0197]
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of further details of a microcomputer corresponding to the microcomputer of FIG. 1. The microcomputer MCU shown in the figure comprises as the same function blocks as those shown in FIG. 1 a central processing unit CPU, a flash memory FMRY, a serial communication interface SCI, a control circuit CONT and a random access memory RAM. As equivalence to the timer of FIG. 1, the microcomputer comprises a 16-bit integrated timer pulse unit IPU and a watchdog timer WDTMR. Also, as equivalence to the peripheral circuits I/O of FIG. 1, the microcomputer comprises ports PORT[0198] 1 to PORT12. Further, as the other function blocks, there are provided a clock oscillator CPG, an interruption controller IRCONT, an analog/digital converter ADC and a wait state controller WSCONT. The central processing unit CPU, flash memory FMRY, random access memory RAM and 16-bit integrated timer pulse unit IPU are coupled to an address bus ABUS, a lower data bus LDBUS (for example, 8 bits) and an upper data bus HDBUS (for example, 8 bits). The serial communication interface SCI, watchdog timer WDTMR, interruption controller IRCONT, analog/digital converter ADC, wait state controller WSCONT, chip select controller CSCONT and ports PORT1 to PORT12 are coupled to the address bus ABUS and higher data bus HDBUS.
  • In FIG. 14, the chip select controller CSCONT, an example of a circuit structure is shown in FIG. 66, serves as means for decoding higher bits (for example, [0199] bits 15 to 7) of the address bus (ABUS) to generate a selection signal indicating which address area the address signal on the address bus (ABUS) designates for selection. The chip select controller CSCONT may include a plurality of address area designation registers which are set for designating address areas of the built-in random access memory RAM, address areas of the built-in flash memory, address areas of I/O devices such as a memory and/or a floppy disk controller externally connected to the microcomputer MCU.
  • When the access speed of the I/O devices such as a memory and/or a floppy disk controller externally connected to the microcomputer is lower than the access speed of the microcomputer, the chip select controller CSCONT decodes the address signal on the address bus to determine whether the address signal is for an access to a low speed memory or an I/O device externally connected to the microcomputer MCU. If so determined, the the chip select controller CSCONT informs the wait state controller WSCONT thereof. As a result, the wait state controller WSCONT inserts one or more wait states in the bus cycle of the microcomputer. Such chip select controller as described above is disclosed, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,070,473 issued on Dec. 3, 1991 and assigned to Hitachi Microcomputer Engineering Ltd. and Hitachi, Ltd., the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. [0200]
  • In FIG. 14, Vpp designates a high voltage for rewrite of the flash memory. EXTAL and XTAL represent signals supplied from a not-shown vibrator, provided externally of the chip of the microcomputer, to the clock oscillator CPG. Denoted by φ is a synchronizing clock signal delivered from the clock oscillator CPG to the outside. MD[0201] 0 to MD2 designate mode signals supplied to the control circuit CONT in order to set the first operation mode or the second operation mode upon rewrite of the flash memory FMRY and correspond to the mode signal MODE in FIG. 1. Denoted by RES* is a reset signal and by STBY* is a standby signal, these signals being supplied to the central processing unit CPU and other circuit blocks. NMI designates a non-maskable interrupt signal for applying a non-maskable interruption to the interruption controller ICONT. Other interruption signals, not shown, are applied to the interruption controller ICONT through the ports PORT8 and PORT9. Denoted by AS* is an address strobe signal indicative of validity of an address signal delivered to the outside, by RD* is a read signal for informing the outside of a read cycle, by HWR* is an upper byte write signal for informing the outside of a write cycle of upper 8 bits and by LWR* is a lower byte write signal for informing the outside of a write cycle of lower 8 bits, these signals being access control signals for the outside of the microcomputer MCU.
  • The ports PORT[0202] 1 and PORT2 are allotted, though not limitedly, for input/output of data BD0 to BD15 used for the microcomputer MCU to access the outside in the other mode than the second operation mode in which the external PROM writer performs direct rewrite control of the flash memory FMRY. At that time, the ports PORT3 to PORT 5 are allotted, though not limitedly, for address signals BA0 to BA19.
  • On the other hand, when the second operation mode is set in the microcomputer MCU, the ports PORT[0203] 2 to PORT5 and PORT8 are allotted, though not limitedly, for connection to the PROM writer adapted to control write of the flash memory FMRY. More specifically, the port PORT2 is allotted for input/output of data ED0 to ED7 for write and verify and the ports PORT3 to PORT5 and PORT8 are allotted for input of address signals EA0 to EA16 as well as input of access control signal CE* (chip enable signal), OE* (output enable signal) and WE* (write enable signal). The chip enable signal CE* is an operation selection signal for the flash memory FMRY delivered from the PROM writer, the output enable signal OE* is a designation signal of an output operation for the flash memory FMRY and the write enable signal WE* is a designation signal of a write operation for the flash memory FMRY. For inputting one-bit EA9 of address signals EA0 to EA16, the input terminal of the signal NMI is allotted. External terminals of the thus allotted ports and other necessary external terminals including the application terminal of high voltage Vpp are connected to the general purpose PROM writer through the conversion socket SOCKET explained in connection with FIG. 3. Conveniently, the allotment of the external terminals at that time can be done in the form of such a terminal arrangement that the microcomputer MCU can be connected with ease to the PROM writer PRW through the conversion socket SOCKET. The external terminals allotted for connection to the PROM writer PRW in the second operation mode are assigned with other functions in the other operation mode of the microcomputer MCU.
  • FIG. 15 shows a top view of a flat package of the FIG. 14 microcomputer MCU which is, for example, sealed with resin and designed to have external terminals in four directions. Signals shown in FIG. 15 are identical to those shown in FIG. 14. External terminals (pins) not assigned with signal names may be utilized as an input pin of a wait signal, an input pin of a bus request signal, an output pin of a bus acknowledge signal and input/output pins for signals between such a peripheral circuit as serial communication interface SCI and the outside. [0204]
  • In the package FP shown in FIG. 15, the distance PP between adjacent terminals (pins) led from the package FP may be 0.5 mm or less. To explain, consider that a user of the microcomputer MCU connects the flash memory FMRY included in the microcomputer MCU to the PROM writer PRW through the conversion socket SOCKET so as to write data into the flash memory FMRY. In this case, when the distance between adjacent terminals (pin pitch) PP of the package FP is set to be 0.5 mm or less, pin bends due to unwanted contact between external terminals of the conversion socket SOCKET and those of the package FP tend to occur when the package FP is inserted into the conversion socket SOCKET. In the event that such pin bends take place, electrical connection between terminals of the conversion socket SOCKET and those of the package FP is prevented in respect of terminals suffering from the pin bends, thus making it impossible to write data into the flash memory FMRY by means of the PROM writer PRW. [0205]
  • As far as this point is concerned, according to the invention, the central processing unit CPU is allowed to write data into the flash memory FMRY and therefore, after the package of the microcomputer MCU is mounted on a mounting board (printed board), the user can write data in the flash memory FMRY by means of the central processing unit CPU without using the external PROM writer PRW for write of data into the flash memory FMRY, whereby even when the microcomputer MCU is sealed in the package having the pin pitch which is 0.5 mm or less, the user can be relieved from committing lead bends of external terminals led from the package. It is to be noted that in the semiconductor maker, an automatic handler can be used and therefore a test of the microcomputer MCU can be conducted steadily and without causing pin bends even if the microcomputer MCU is sealed in the package of the pin pitch being 0.5 mm or less. [0206]
  • [11] A Control Circuit for Rewrite of Flash Memory FMRY [0207]
  • FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the whole of the flash memory FRMY incorporated in the microcomputer MCU of FIG. 14. In the figure, ARY designates a memory array in which memory cells formed of insulated gate field effect transistors of two-layer gate structure explained in connection with FIGS. 11A and 11B are arranged in matrix. In this memory array ARY, like the construction explained with reference to FIG. 13, control gates of memory cells are connected to a corresponding word line, drain regions of memory cells are connected to a corresponding data line and source regions of memory cells are connected to a source line common to each memory block, but the array is divided into memory blocks in a different manner from FIG. 13. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the array is divided into seven large memory blocks (large blocks) LMB[0208] 0 to LMB6 each having a relatively large storage capacity and eight small memory blocks (small blocks) SMB0 to SMB7 each having a relatively small storage capacity. The large memory block is utilized as, for example, a program storing area or a large capacity data storing area. The small memory block is utilized as, for example, a small capacity data storing area.
  • In FIG. 16, ALAT designates a latch circuit for address signals PAB[0209] 0 to PAB15. In the first operation mode, the address signals PAB0 to PAB15 correspond to output address signals BA0 to BA15 of the central processing unit CPU. In the second operation mode, the address signals PAB0 to PAB15 correspond to output address signals EA0 to EA15 of the PROM writer PRW. XADEC designates a row address decoder for decoding a row address signal fetched in through the address latch ALAT. WDRV designates a word driver for driving a word line on the basis of a selection signal delivered out of the row address decoder XADEC. In a data read operation, the word driver WDRV drives the word line with a voltage of 5 V and in a data write operation, drives the word line with a high voltage of 12 V. In a data erase operation, all outputs of the word driver WDRV are rendered to be a low voltage level of 0V. YADEC designates a column address decoder for decoding a column address signal fetched in through the address latch YALAT. YSEL designates a column selection circuit for selecting a data line in accordance with an output selection signal of the column address decoder YADEC. SAMP designates a sense amplifier for amplifying a read signal from a data line selected by the column selection circuit YSEL in a data read operation. DOLAT designates a data output latch for holding an output of the sense amplifier. DOBUFF designates a data output buffer for delivering data held in the data output latch DOLAT to the outside. In the figure, PDB0 to PDB7 are data of lower 8 bits (one byte) and PDB8 to PDB15 are data of upper 8 bits. In accordance with this example, the output data is of two bytes at maximum. DIBUFF designates a data input buffer for fetching write data fed from the outside. The data fetched in by the data input buffer DIBUFF is held in a data input latch circuit DILAT. When the data held in the data input latch circuit DILAT is “0”, a write circuit WRIT supplies a write high voltage to a data line selected by the column selection circuit YSEL. This write high voltage is supplied to the drain of a memory cell whose control gate is applied with a high voltage in accordance with a row address signal, so that the memory cell in question undergoes write. ERASEC designates an erase circuit for supplying an erase high voltage to a source line of a designated memory block to erase the memory block simultaneously.
  • FCONT designates a control circuit for performing timing control of a data read operation and selection control of various timings and voltages for write and erase. This control circuit FCONT comprises a control register CREG including the erase block designation register MBREG and the program/erase control register PEREG. [0210]
  • FIG. 18 shows an example of the control register CREG. The control register CREG includes a program/erase control register PEREG of 8 bits and erase block designation registers MBREG[0211] 1 and MBREGG2 each being of 8 bits. In the program/erase control register PEREG, Vpp represents a high voltage applying flag which is rendered to be “1” in accordance with the application of a rewrite high voltage. An E bit is a bit for designating an erase operation and an EV bit is a bit for designating a verify operation for erasure. A P bit is a bit for designating a write operation (program operation) and a PV bit is a bit for designating a verify operation for writing. The erase block designation register MBREG1 is a register for designating any one of memory blocks contained in the seven divisions of large block and the erase block designation register MBREG2 is a register for designating any one of memory blocks contained in the eight divisions of small block, each of these registers having 0-th bit to seventh bit which are bits for designating individual memory blocks whereby, for example, bit “1” signifies selection of a corresponding memory block and bit “0” signifies unselection of a corresponding memory block. For example, when the seventh bit of the erase block designation register is “1”, the small memory block SMB7 is designated.
  • The control register CREG is readable/writable from the outside. The control circuit FCONT makes reference to the contents set in the control register CREG to control erase and write in accordance with the contents. The operation state of erase and write can be controlled by the CPU or externally by rewriting the contents of the control register CREG. [0212]
  • In FIG. 16, the control circuit FCONT is supplied with control signals of FLM, MS-FLM, MS-MISN, M2RDN, M2WRN, MRDN, MWRN, IOWOTDN and RST and is also supplied with data of PDB[0213] 8 to PDB15 of upper one byte and predetermined bits of address signals PAB0 to PAB15.
  • The control signal FLM is a signal for designating an operation mode of the flash memory FMRY whereby its “0” designates the first operation mode and its “1” designates the second operation mode. This signal FLM is formed on the basis of, for example, the mode signals MD[0214] 0 to MD2.
  • The control signal MS-FLN is a selection signal of the flash memory FMRY whereby its “0” designates selection and its “1” designates unselection. In the first operation mode, the central processing unit CPU delivers the control signal MS-FLN and in the second operation mode, the control signal MS-FLM corresponds to a chip enable signal CE* supplied from the PROM writer PRW. [0215]
  • The control signal MS-MISN is a selection signal of the control register CREG. In this case, selection of which one of the program/erase control register PEREG, erase block designation register MBREG[0216] 1 and erase block register MBREG2 is determined by consulting predetermined bits of the address signals PAB0 to PAB15. In the first operation mode, the central processing unit CPU delivers the control signal MS-MISN. In the second mode, the most significant address bit EA16 delivered out of the PROM writer PRM is deemed as the control signal MS-MISN, though not limitedly.
  • The M2RDN is a memory read strobe signal, the M2WRN is a memory write strobe signal, the MRDN is a read signal of the control register CREG and the MWRN is a write signal of the control register CREG. In the first operation mode, the central processing unit CPU delivers these control signals. In the second operation mode, though not limitedly, a write enable signal WE* supplied from the PROM writer PRW is deemed as the M2WRN and MWRN and an output enable signal OE* supplied from the PROM writer is deemed as the M2RDN and MRDN. The memory write strobe signal M2WRN is deemed as a strobe signal for writing data to be written in a memory cell into the data input latch circuit DILAT. Practically, write into the memory cell is started by setting a P bit of the control register CREG. [0217]
  • IOWORDN is a signal for switching access to the flash memory FMRY between 8-bit read access and 16-bit read access. In the second operation mode, this control signal IOWORDN is fixed to a logical value for designating the 8-bit read access. [0218]
  • RST is a reset signal for the flash memory FMRY. When the flash memory FMRY is reset by this signal RST or when the Vpp flag of program/erase control register PEREG is rendered to be “0”, the mode setting bits EV, PV, E and P in the program/erase control register PEREG are cleared. [0219]
  • FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing an example of a memory read operation in the flash memory FMRY. In the figure, CK[0220] 1M and CK2M are non-overlap 2-phase clock signals which are deemed as operation reference clock signals. Denoted by tCYC is cycle time which differs only slightly from access time for the RAM. A read operation of the control register CREG is carried out at similar timings.
  • FIG. 20 is a timing chart showing an example of a memory write operation in the flash memory FMRY. In a memory write operation designated by a write strobe signal M2WRN shown in the figure, actual write of a memory cell is not carried out as described previously but input address signals PAB[0221] 0 to PAB15 are held in the address latch circuit ALAT and input data of PB8 to PB15 is held in the data input latch DILAT, thus completing a write cycle of interest. A write operation of the control register CREG is conducted at similar timings but in this case, actual data write into the control register CREG is carried out.
  • [12] Details of the Rewrite Control Procedure of the Flash Memory FMRY [0222]
  • In this item, an example of details of the control procedure will be described in which the central processing unit CPU or the PROM writer performs write and erase of the flash memory through the control circuit FCONT. Basically, in the flash memory, information is written into a memory cell under the erase condition. In the first operation mode in which rewrite of the flash memory is effected with the microcomputer mounted on the system, a rewrite control program to be executed by the central processing unit CPU includes a program for erase and a program for write. The rewrite control program can be programmed such that an erase process routine is initially executed and a write process routine is automatically executed without interruption in accordance with designation of the first operation mode. Alternatively, erase and write may be separated and then the first operation mode may be designated thereto separately. Rewrite control by the PROM writer can be executed through a similar operation to that of the first operation mode. The write control procedure and erase control procedure will now be described. [0223]
  • FIG. 21 shows an example of details of the write control procedure. The procedure shown in the figure is the procedure for write of data of, for example, one byte and is common to both of the control by the central processing unit CPU in the first operation mode and the control by the PROM writer in the second operation mode. The following description will be given by way of a control master which is represented by the central processing unit CPU. [0224]
  • In the initial step of data write in a unit of byte, the central processing unit CPU sets one to a counter n built therein (step S[0225] 1). Subsequently, the central processing unit CPU performs the memory write operation explained in connection with FIG. 20 to set data to be written in the flash memory FMRY to the data input latch circuit DILAT shown in FIG. 16 and set an address to be written with the data to the address latch circuit ALAT (step S2). Then, the central processing unit CPU issues a write cycle to the control register CREG to set a program bit P (step 3). Through this, the control circuit FCONT applies, on the basis of the data and address set in the step 2, high voltages to the control gate and the drain of a memory cell designated by the address to perform write. The central processing unit CPU waits for, for example, 10 μsec. to clear the write process time on the flash memory side (step S4) and then clears the program bit P (step S5).
  • Thereafter, in order to confirm the write state, the central processing unit CPU issues a write cycle to the control register CREG and sets a program verify bit PV (step [0226] 6). Through this, the control circuit CONT utilizes the address set by the step 2 to apply a verify voltage to a word line to be selected by that address and to read data from the memory cell subjected to write. To ensure a sufficient write level, the verify level voltage is set to a voltage level of, for example, 7 V which is higher than the power supply voltage Vcc such as 5 V. Thus, the central processing unit CPU checks coincidence of read-out data with data utilized for write (step S7). If the central processing unit CPU confirms coincidence through verify, it clears the program verify bit PV (step S8), thus completing write of the one-byte data.
  • On the other hand, if the central processing unit CPU confirms non-coincidence through verify by step S[0227] 7, it clears the program verify bit PV in step S9 and thereafter decides whether the value of counter n reaches a write retry upper-limit frequency N (step S10). Thus, if the write retry upper-limit frequency N is reached, defective write is determined and the processing ends. If the write retry upper-limit frequency N is not reached, the central processing unit CPU increments the value of counter n by one (step S11) and repeats the processing beginning with the step S3.
  • FIG. 22 shows an example of details of the erase control procedure. The procedure shown in the figure is common to both of the control by the central processing unit CPU in the first operation mode and the control by the PROM writer in the second operation mode. The following description will be given by way of a control master which is represented by the central processing unit CPU. [0228]
  • Upon erase, the central processing unit CPU sets one to its built-in counter n (step S[0229] 21). Subsequently, the central processing unit CPU performs pre-write of memory cells within an area to be erased (step S22). Namely, data “0” is written in a memory cell at an address to be erased. The control procedure for pre-write may make use of the write control procedure explained with reference to FIG. 21. This pre-write processing is carried out in order to uniform, over all bits, electric charge amounts present in the floating gates before erasing, thus making the erase state uniform.
  • Subsequently, the central processing unit CPU issues a write cycle to the control register CREG to designate a memory block to be erased simultaneously (step S[0230] 23). More particularly, a memory block number to be erased is designated to the erase block designation registers MBREG1 and MBREG2. After the designation of the memory block to be erased, the central processing unit CPU issues a write cycle to the control register CREG to set an erase bit E (step 24). Through this, the control circuit ECONT applies a high voltage to a source line of the memory block designated by the step 23 to erase the memory block of interest simultaneously. The central processing unit CPU waits for, for example, 10 msec. to clear the batch erasing process time on the flash memory side (step S25). A time duration of 10 msec. is shorter than the time for completing one erase operation. Then, the erase bit E is cleared (step S26).
  • Thereafter, in order to confirm the erase state, the central processing unit CPU first sets internally a head address of the memory block to be erased simultaneously as an address to be verified (step S[0231] 27) and then performs dummy write to the verify address (step S28). Namely, a memory write cycle is issued to the address to be verified. Through this, the memory address to be verified is held in the address latch circuit ALAT. Subsequently, the central processing unit CPU issues a write cycle to the control register CREG and sets an erase verify bit EV (step 29). Through this, the control circuit FCONT utilizes the address set by the step 28 to apply an erase verify voltage to the word line to be selected by the address and to read data of the erased memory cell. To ensure a sufficient erase level, the erase verify voltage is set to a voltage level of, for example, 3.5 V which is lower than the power supply voltage Vcc such as 5 V. Thus, the central processing unit CPU verifies coincidence of read-out data with data under the erase completion state (step S30). If the central processing unit CPU confirms coincidence through verify, it clears the erase verify bit EV (step S31) and then decides whether the present verify address is a final address of the erased memory block (step S32), thus completing a series of erase operations if the final address is identified. If the final address is not reached, the central processing unit CPU increments the verify address by one (step S33) and repeats the processing beginning with the step S29.
  • On the other hand, if the central processing unit CPU confirms non-coincidence through verify by step S[0232] 30, it clears the erase verify bit EV in step S34 and thereafter decides whether the value of counter n reaches a gradual erase upper-limit frequency N (step S35). If the gradual erase upper-limit frequency N is reached, a defective erase is determined and the processing ends. If the gradual erase upper-limit is not reached, the central processing unit CPU increments the value of counter n by one (step S36) and repeats the processing beginning with step S24. Practically, in order to prevent an excessive erase in which the threshold voltage of the memory cell assumes a negative value owing to erase effected excessively, erase is gradually repeated for a short time of 10 msec while performing verify every frequency.
  • [13] Formation of a Plurality of Memory Blocks Having Different Storage Capacities and Defined Each in a Unit of Word Line [0233]
  • FIG. 24 shows a memory mat configuration of a flash memory in which a plurality of memory blocks are defined each in a unit of word line and the simultaneously erasable memory blocks have different storage capacities. [0234]
  • While in the configuration shown in FIG. 13 memory blocks are defined each in a unit of data line, memory blocks are defined in a unit of word line in FIG. 24. In the figure, a memory block LMB having a relatively large storage capacity and a memory block SMB having a relatively small storage capacity are illustrated as representatives throughout memory array portions ARY[0235] 0 to ARY7.
  • In each of the memory array portions ARY[0236] 0 to ARY7, memory cells MC formed of insulated gate field effect transistors of two-layer gate structure as explained previously in connection with FIG. 11 are arranged in matrix. In the figure, WL0 to WLn designate word lines which are common to all of the memory array portions ARY0 to ARY7. Control gates of memory cells arranged on the same row are connected to a corresponding word line. In each of the memory array portions ARY0 to ARY7, drain regions of memory cells MC arranged on the same column are connected to a corresponding data line DL0, . . . or DLm. Source regions of memory cells MC constituting the small memory block SMB are connected in common to a source line SLwi extending in the word line direction and source regions of memory cells MC constituting the large memory block LMB are connected in common to a source line SLw1 extending in the word line direction. As in the case of FIG. 13, in simultaneous erasing effected in a unit of memory block, a memory block to be erased simultaneously is designated by the erase block designation register, so that high voltage Vpp for erase is supplied to a source line of the designated memory block. Details of the voltage conditions for erase and write will be described later. YSEL designates a Y selection circuit, CD a common data line, WRIT a write circuit, DILAT a data input latch, SAMP a sense amplifier, DOLAT a data output latch, DIBUFF a data input buffer and DOBUFF a data output buffer.
  • The relation between memory array portions ARY[0237] 0 to ARY7 and output data resembles that in FIG. 13. More particularly, one bit of input/output data corresponds to one memory mat. For example, data D0 is under the charge of the memory array portion ARY0. By employing such a configuration of one memory mat per one input/output, the common data line CD can be sectioned, one for each memory array portion, and need not extend over a long distance throughout all of the memory array portions, as illustrated in FIGS. 25A and 25B. The length of the common data line CD is much smaller than that of the common data line CD′. Accordingly, parasitic capacitance (Cst) associated with the common data line CD can be reduced (Cst<<C′st) to contribute to speed-up of access and a low voltage operation.
  • When memory blocks such as LMB and SMB are defined each in a unit of word line as shown in FIG. 24, a minimum memory block in the whole of memory array ARY having a parallel input/output bit number equal to one byte has a storage capacity corresponding to that of one word line, that is, the storage capacity corresponding to the number of memory cells associated with one word line over the entire memory array. This holds regardless of the number of parallel input/output bits. Contrarily, when memory blocks are defined each in unit of data line as shown in FIG. 13, a minimum memory block in the whole of memory array has a storage capacity complying with the number of parallel input/output bits to amount up to a storage capacity of 8 data lines (one data line is associated with each memory mat). Accordingly, if the number of memory bits in the direction of data line is ⅛ of the number of memory bits in the direction of word line, no difference takes place between memory blocks defined in a unit of data line and memory blocks defined in a unit of word line. Practically, however, the number of memory bits in the direction of data line is conditioned by the efficiency of layout of semiconductor integrated circuit formation or the efficiency of addressing memory cells, amounting up to about ½ of the number of memory bits in the direction of word line and in addition, due to the fact that the flash memory built in the microcomputer is connected to internal data bus, the number of parallel input/output bits is defined in a unit of byte or word. For these reasons, the storage capacity of the minimum memory block can be reduced drastically in the case where memory blocks are defined each in a unit of word line. With the minimum size of memory block reduced, convenience of use of a memory block as a data area can be improved further and besides the effect of preventing such wastefulness that information is erased simultaneously together with information which need not substantially be rewritten and then the latter information is again written can fulfill itself. [0238]
  • [14] Countermeasures Against Data Line Disturbance in an Unselected Block for Writing [0239]
  • FIGS. 26A and 26B show an example of the voltage conditions for erase/write available when memory blocks are defined each in a unit of word line. Especially, countermeasures against data line disturbance are applied to an unselected block (unselected memory block) for writing. [0240]
  • In FIG. 26A showing the voltage conditions for erase, a selected block (selected memory block) [0241] 20 is a memory block selected for simultaneous erasing and an unselected block 21 is a memory block not selected for simultaneous erasing. In an erase operation, word lines WLh to WLk depicted as representatives are applied with ground potential GND such as 0 V. In the selected block 20, its common source line SLwm is applied with a high voltage Vpp of, for example, 12 V so that memory cells of the selected block 20 may be erased simultaneously. In the unselected block 21, its common source line SLwn is maintained at ground potential GND to inhibit erase.
  • In FIG. 26B showing the voltage conditions for write, a selected [0242] block 30 is a memory block containing memory cells selected for writing and an unselected block 31 is a memory block not containing memory cells to be written. In the selected block 30, a common source line SLwm is applied with ground potential GND and when, for example, a memory cell MC circled by phantom line is to be written, high voltage Vpp is applied to a word line WLh connected with its control gate and a relatively high voltage Vp of, for example, 6 V is applied to its data line. In the selected block 30, a word line WLi not selected is applied with ground potential GND.
  • Upon writing, in the [0243] unselected block 31, all word lines WLj and WLk are maintained at ground potential GND, so that memory cells are rendered not to be selected. Because of the nature of formation of memory blocks in a unit of word line, the data line extending into the unselected block 31 is also applied with voltage Vp in accordance with write effected in the selected block 30. Namely, a memory cell MC in the unselected block 31 is placed in the condition of word line unselection and data line selection in accordance with write effected in the selected block 30. For example, in accordance with the condition shown in FIG. 26B, when a circled memory cell in the selected block is to be written, a memory cell (surrounded by a quadrangle of phantom line) in the unselected block 31 and connected to a data line DLk associated with the former memory cell is applied with voltage Vp. Then, a common source line SLwn in the unselected block 31 is applied with a voltage Vddi (data line disturbance prevention voltage) of, for example, 3.5 V to apply countermeasures against data line disturbance. If the source line SLwn is applied with ground potential GND as in the case of the selected block 30, then data line disturbance will occur. In the selected block 30, memory cells which are connected to data line DLk and are not to be written are applied with ground potential GND at their associated word lines and source lines to set up the same condition as that responsible for occurrence of data line disturbance but such condition can be substantially negligible. This will become apparent from item [15] of “Correlation of data line disturbance time between memory blocks” to be described later with reference to FIG. 29.
  • FIG. 27A shows the mechanism of generation of data line disturbance. More particularly, in a region (1) near the source side end of drain, electron and hole pairs are generated through a tunnel phenomenon between bands. At that time, if the source is maintained at ground potential GND and the drain is maintained at a relatively high voltage Vp to generate a relatively large electric field, holes of the electron and hole pairs are accelerated by an electric field in a depletion layer of the region (2) and turn into hot holes. The hot holes pass through a thin tunnel insulating film of about 10 nm thickness (under floating gate electrode [0244] 8) so as to be injected into the floating gate 8. This state is a data line disturbance state and when a memory cell transistor suffers from the data line disturbance for a long time, its threshold is decreased, with the result that the memory cell being in write state “0” changes to erase state “1” and the memory cell being in erase state “1” undergoes depletion to cause an unwanted change of stored information or an eventual erroneous operation (data line disturbance fault).
  • FIG. 27B shows the mechanism of countermeasurements against data line disturbance. To describe, when potential on the source side is raised in the unselected block for writing by applying a voltage Vddi of 3.5 V to the source of a memory cell as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, an electric field in a depletion layer as indicated by a region (2) is weakened and as a result, the turning of holes of electron and hole pairs into hot holes is prevented to ensure that the reduction in threshold of the memory cell transistor can be prevented. [0245]
  • FIG. 28 shows an example of experiment concerning the change of threshold of a memory cell with respect to data line disturbance time. In this experiment, a memory cell transistor as shown in the figure is used and write is repeated to obtain threshold voltages by maintaining the source potential Vs at 0 V, floating (open) and 3.5 V, respectively, under the condition that ground potential GND is applied to the control gate and substrate of the memory cell transistor and 6.5 V is applied to the drain thereof. The upper portion of the figure is for the memory cell transistor being in the write state “0” and the lower portion is for the memory cell transistor being in the erase state “1”. As is clear from the figure, for Vs=3.5 V, a decrease in threshold which is too large to be negligible does not occur within a data line disturbance time of about 1000 seconds under any of the erase state and the write state. [0246]
  • From the above, it will be understood that in order to prevent occurrence of faults due to data line disturbance, the source potential of the unselected memory block needs to be biased with a data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi such as 3.5 V not higher than the drain voltage and the data line disturbance time needs to be reduced to as small a value as possible. [0247]
  • [15] Correlation of Data Line Disturbance Time Between Memory Blocks [0248]
  • The correlation of data line disturbance time between a memory block MBa having a relatively small storage capacity and a memory block MBb having a relatively large storage capacity as shown in FIG. 29 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the common source line of an unselected block for writing is also maintained at ground potential GND as in selected block for writing. The data line disturbance time in this case is shown in Table 2. In this table, though not limitedly, the write time per memory cell one bit is set to 100 μsec. and the number of times of the erase and write is set to 10000. One erase and write operation referred to herein means such an operation that an object memory block is erased simultaneously and thereafter individual word lines are sequentially selected to write memory cells. But the data line disturbance time of a memory cell in the memory block selected for writing is handled on the assumption that a word line to which the memory cell of interest is coupled is not selected. [0249]
    TABLE 2
    data line data line
    disturbance time disturbance time
    affecting MCa affecting MCb
    MBa selected, <PHASE A/A> <PHASE B/A>
    MBb unselected 100 μS × 15 × 1 time = 100 μS × 16 × 104
    1.5 msec times = 1.6 sec
    MBb selected, <PHASE A/B> <PHASE B/B>
    MBa unselected 100 μS × 1008 × 104 100 μS × 1007 × 1
    times = 1000 sec time = 0.1 sec
  • According to the results, the data line disturbance time affecting a memory cell MCa of the memory block MBa is 1.5 msec when the memory block MBa of interest is selected for writing (Phase A/A) and 1000 sec. when the memory block MBb is selected (Phase A/B). Firstly, this difference is due to a difference in storage capacity (the number of word lines) between the memory blocks MBa and MBb. Namely, this is due to the fact that while in a calculation equation of data line disturbance time shown in Phase A/A which is 100 μs×15×one frequency the time of word line switching upon write following simultaneous erasing of the memory block is 15 which corresponds to the number of word lines of the memory block MBa, the number of times of word line switching upon write following simultaneous erasing of the memory block is 1008 corresponding to the number of word lines of the memory block MBb in a calculation equation of data line disturbance time shown in Phase A/B which is 100 μs×1008×10000 frequencies. Secondly, the above difference is attributable to the fact that in calculation of the data line disturbance time affecting the memory cell MCa in the memory block MBa selected for rewriting the number of times of substantial rewrite is deemed as one. More specifically, the difference is due to the fact while the number of times of rewrite is deemed as one in the calculation equation of data line disturbance time shown in Phase A/A which is 100 μs×15×one time, the number of times of rewrite is 10000 which coincides with the number of times of actual rewrite operations in the calculation equation of the data line disturbance time shown in Phase A/B which is 100 μs×1008×10000 times. Presumably, this is because for the memory cell MCa in the memory block MBa selected for rewriting, threshold voltages of all memory cells are raised through pre-write preceding simultaneously erasing and thereafter erase is carried out stepwise from the viewpoint of prevention of excessive erase upon each rewrite operation as explained with reference to FIG. 22, so that the data line disturbance time of the memory cell MCa of interest is substantially defined by the time for one rewrite operation. In other words, the data line disturbance state affecting the memory cell MCa in the memory block MBa selected for rewriting is deemed as being initialized every rewrite operation. Contrary to this, when a memory block selected for rewriting is the memory block MBb, the memory cell MCa does not undergo the initialization and the data line disturbance time is accumulated in accordance with the frequency of actual rewrite operations. [0250]
  • Similarly, the data line disturbance time affecting the memory cell MCb of the memory block MBb is 0.1 sec. when the memory block MBb of interest is selected as write object (Phase B/B) and is 16 sec. when the memory block MBa is selected (Phase B/A). As in the preceding, this difference is also due to the fact that the storage capacity (the number of word lines) differs between the memory blocks and the substantial frequency of rewrite operations is deemed as one in the calculation of the data line disturbance time affecting the memory cell MCb in the memory block MBb selected for rewriting. [0251]
  • From this, it is clear that the data line disturbance time to which the unselected memory block is subjected owing to write of the selected memory block is far longer than the data line disturbance time affecting the memory cell in the selected memory block. Accordingly, it will be appreciated that in order to prevent a decrease in threshold voltage of a memory cell due to data line disturbance, the common source line on the unselected memory block side for writing is at least required to be biased by voltage Vddi but the data line disturbance time affecting the memory cell in the selected memory block can be neglected without causing almost any troubles. [0252]
  • Further, the following will be clear from the contents of Phase A/B and Phase B/A in the correlation of the data line disturbance time shown in Table 2. Namely, the data line disturbance time (e.g., 1000 sec) affecting an unselected memory block having a small storage capacity owing to write of a memory block having a large capacity is relatively larger than the data line disturbance time (e.g., 1.6 sec) in the converse case. [0253]
  • [16] A Transfer Gate Circuit for Data Line Separation [0254]
  • FIGS. 30A and 30B show an embodiment of a memory array in which a transfer gate circuit for selectively separating data lines is interposed between memory blocks. A transfer gate circuit TGC is arranged between memory blocks MBa and MBb and has transfer MOS transistors T[0255] 0 to Tk associated with data lines DL0 to DLk in one to one correspondence relationship, the transfer MOS transistors being controlled for switching by a control signal DT. According to this example, a Y selection circuit YSEL such as a column selection switch circuit is arranged on the side of the memory block MBb. FIG. 30B shows switch control modes of the transfer MOS transistors T0 to Tk. When the memory block MBa is a selected block for writing, the transfer MOS transistors T0 to Tk are rendered on. At that time, source potential Vsa of the memory block MBb serving as the selected block for writing is maintained at ground potential GND and source potential Vsb of the memory block MBb standing for the unselected block for writing is maintained at data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi such as 3.5 V. On the other hand, when the memory block MBb is a selected block for writing, the transfer MOS transistors T0 to Tk are rendered off. At that time, source potential Vsb of the memory block MBb standing for the write selected block is maintained at ground potential GND. Source potential Vsa of the memory block MBa standing for an unselected block for writing may be maintained at either data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi such as 3.5 V or ground potential GND (or floating). This is because by virtue of the transfer MOS transistors T0 to Tk rendered to be cutoff, data line write voltage Vp fed through the Y selection circuit YSEL is not transmitted to the memory block MBa.
  • The transfer gate circuit TGC is in particular of significance in connection with the data line disturbance time of an unselected block for writing as will be described below. More specifically, when the memory block MBa is set to be a selected block for writing, a relatively high voltage Vp for write of the memory block MBa is applied through a data line to the memory block MBb preceding the transfer gate circuit TGC (on the side of Y selection circuit YSEL). Under this condition, the common source line of the memory block MBb serving as an unselected block for writing is applied with data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi to essentially prevent data line disturbance but as this condition continues for a long time (resulting in considerable prolongation of the data line disturbance time), the threshold of a memory cell subject to write condition in the unselected memory block for writing MBb slightly decreases even if the source of the memory cell is biased by voltage Vddi, as will be clear from FIG. 28. Thus, by taking advantage of the fact that the data line disturbance time affecting a memory block of a small storage capacity owing to write concomitant with rewrite of a memory block of a large storage capacity is relatively larger than the data line disturbance time in the converse case, as described with reference to FIGS. 30A and 30B, the transfer gate circuit TGC intervenes such that the memory block MBb on the side of Y selection circuit YSEL is made to be a large memory block having a relatively large storage capacity and the memory block MBa on the opposite side is made to be a small memory block having a relatively small storage capacity. By making the memory block MBa a small memory block and making the memory block MBb a large memory block in this manner, the data line disturbance time affecting a memory cell of the memory block MBb owing to write of the memory block MBa can be far shorter than the data line disturbance time in the case where the memory block MBa is made to be a large memory block and the memory block MBb is made to be a small memory block. Through this, prevention of an erroneous operation due to data line disturbance can further be perfected. [0256]
  • The countermeasures against data line disturbance are summed up in FIG. 31. In the figure, the voltage application condition showing countermeasures against data line disturbance for the unselected memory block shown at (A) is representative of a memory cell transistor connected to a data line which is interrupted from the supply of write voltage by the off state of the transfer gate circuit TGC. [0257]
  • [17] Dummy Word Lines [0258]
  • FIGS. 32, 33 and [0259] 34 are circuit diagrams in which a dummy word line is arranged between a memory block and a transfer gate circuit. In each of the figures, DWA designates a dummy word line on the side of a memory block MBa, and DWB a dummy word line on the side of a memory block MBb. One DWA of the dummy word lines is coupled with control gates of dummy cells DC1 to DC3 and the other DWB is coupled with control gates of dummy cells DC4 to DC6. Each of the dummy cells DC0 to DC6 is formed of the same transistor as that of a memory cell. In FIG. 32, the dummy cells DC0 to DC6 have their sources made to be floating and their drains coupled to data lines. In FIG. 34, the dummy cells DC0 to DC6 have their sources and drains which are made to be floating. In FIG. 34, the dummy cells DC0 to DC6 have their sources connected to a common source line of a corresponding memory block and their drains made to be floating. When a transfer gate circuit TGC is provided between memory blocks, a repetitive pattern of memory cell transistors and word lines is interrupted at a position of the transfer gate circuit and from the standpoint of device structure, there results an abrupt unevenness in the wafer surface. Such an unevenness leads to non-uniformity of thickness of a photoresist film formed when word lines and control gates are formed through, for example, photoetching. This causes partial non-uniformity of dimensions of word lines and control gates and irregularity in electrical characteristics of transistors and word lines results. Under the circumstances, by arranging the dummy word lines DWA and DWB and the dummy cells DC0 to DC3 and DC4 to DC6 at respective ends of the memory blocks MBa and MBb separated by the transfer gate circuit TGC, irregularity in dimensions of word lines and control gates which occurs near the transfer gate circuit TGC can be reduced.
  • [18] Various Forms of Pluralization of Memory Blocks in a Unit of Word Line [0260]
  • As shown in FIG. 35, two memory blocks can be arranged on each side of a transfer gate circuit TGC. Preferably, in this case, memory blocks MBc and MBd on the side of a Y selection circuit YAEL are made to be large memory blocks and memory blocks MBb and MBa succeeding the transfer gate circuit TGC are made to be small memory blocks. For example, the large memory block is used for program storage and the small memory block is used for data storage. [0261]
  • As shown in FIG. 36, a simultaneously erasable, minimum memory block has a single word line and the number of word lines can be increased sequentially to two, three and four. But the number of word lines of individual, simultaneously erasable memory blocks may be determined suitably or the size of individual memory blocks may be changed suitably. [0262]
  • As shown in FIG. 37, when a group of relatively small memory blocks MBa to MBe respectively having one, two, three, four and eight word lines and a group of relatively large memory blocks MBf each having 64 word lines are employed, a transfer gate circuit TGC may preferably be arranged at a boundary part between the large and small memory block groups as will be inferred from the explanation of the previous item [16]. [0263]
  • As shown in FIG. 38, the data line structure is constructed of main data lines and subsidiary data lines. Main data lines DL[0264] 0 to DLk extend to reach all memory blocks MBa to MBc. Subsidiary data lines d0 to dk extend only inside each memory block to connect to drains of memory cells contained in a corresponding memory block. In this case, connection of the main data lines DL0 to DLk to the subsidiary data lines d0 to dk is set up through a transfer gate circuit TGC allotted to each memory block. Such a structure can be realized easily by, for example, a two-layer aluminum wiring structure. Since in the main/subsidiary data line structure the transfer gate circuit TGC is provided in each memory block, write data line potential Vp can be applied to only a selected block for writing. Accordingly, counter measurements against data line disturbance can further be perfected.
  • FIG. 39 shows an embodiment in which simultaneously erasable memory blocks are arranged on the left and right sides of an X address decoder. Decode signals of X address decoder XADEC are delivered to the left and right sides thereof. Then memory blocks MBa to MBc and MBa′ to MBc′ each defined in a unit of word line arranged on each side of the X address decoder XADEC are provided on the left and right sides thereof. As each memory block, any one of the previously described memory blocks can be adopted. The memory blocks on the left and right sides perform input/output of data io[0265] 0 to io7 and data io8 to io15, respectively, in a unit of 8 bits through Y selection circuits YSEL and YSEL′. Transfer MOS transistors Tsw are provided between left-hand outputs of the X address decoder XADEC and word lines WL0 to WLn in one to one correspondence relationship and similarly, transfer MOS transistors Tsw′ are provided between right-hand outputs of the X address decoder XADEC and word lines WLO ‘to WLn’ in one to one correspondence relationship. Further, the left-hand word lines are associated with discharge MOS transistors Csw and the right-hand word lines are associated with discharge MOS transistors Csw′. A control circuit DIVCONT is, responsive to a high voltage Vpp1 (=Vpp such as 12V) and the most significant address bit An, adapted to perform switching control of the left-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw and discharge MOS transistors Csw and of the right-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw′ and discharge MOS transistors Csw′. Though not limitedly, the control circuit DIVCONT receives a high voltage Vpp1 and the most significant address bit An of an address signal and performs complementary switching control between the left-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw and discharge MOS transistors Csw and the right-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw′ and discharge MOS transistors Csw′ in accordance with a logical value of the most significant address bit An. For example, when the most significant address bit An is logical “1”, the right-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw′ are rendered to be on and the left-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw are rendered to be off, so that write data can be supplied through the right-hand Y selection circuit YSEL′. At that time, the right-hand discharge MOS transistors Csw′ are rendered to be off and the left-hand discharge MOS transistors Csw are rendered to be off. When the most significant address bit An is logical “0”, the left-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw are rendered to be on and the right-hand transfer MOS transistors Tsw′ are rendered to be off, so that write data is supplied through the left-hand Y selection circuit YSEL. At that time, the right-hand discharge MOS transistors Csw′ are rendered to be on and the left-hand discharge MOS transistors Csw are rendered to be off. Selection operation of the left-hand and right-hand Y selection circuits YSEL and YSEL′ depends on a decode output of a Y address decoder YADEC but any one of the left-hand and right-hand Y selection circuits YSEL and YSEL′ may be activated by the most significant address bit An or a signal equivalent thereto or any one of the left-hand and right-hand Y selection circuits may be selected as the supply path of write data by means of a separate selection circuit not shown. A signal voltage for rendering the transfer MOS transistors Tsw and Tsw′ on is set to a high voltage during write and an example of the control circuit DIVCONT for this purpose is shown in FIG. 40. A voltage Vpp1 in FIG. 40 can be generated using a power supply circuit of FIG. 51 to be described later.
  • As a comparableness to the configuration shown in FIG. 39, a configuration may be mentioned in which an X address decoder is arranged at one end side of word lines. In this case, the word line direction size of a memory block defined in a minimum unit of word line is doubled as compared to that in FIG. 39. In comparison with the configuration of FIG. 39, this configuration can contribute to reduction of the word line disturbance time of a selected block for writing. More particularly, with reference to FIG. 26B, in the selected [0266] block 30 for writing, there is a memory cell associated with a word line applied with high voltage Vpp and with a data line not applied with write voltage Vp. In the selected block 30 for writing, the memory cell placed in word line selection condition and data line non-selection condition suffers from a large potential difference between the control gate and floating gate, with the result that electric charge is discharged from the floating gate to the control gate and the threshold of the memory cell transistor is forced to be decreased undesirably. This phenomenon is word line disturbance and in proportion to prolongation of this state, the threshold decreases. Accordingly, like the data line disturbance, time for the word line disturbance state to continue (word line disturbance time) is desired to be short. From this viewpoint, the configuration of FIG. 39 is more advantageous than the comparative configuration in that the number of memory cells exposed to the word line disturbance state can be halved on the presumption that write is effected in a unit of 8 bits. This contributes to reduction of the word line disturbance time.
  • FIG. 41 shows an embodiment directed to the provision of redundant words in a memory block. In the figure, a redundant word line WRa, a redundant data line DR and redundant memory cells RC for relieving a defective word line are arranged in a memory block MBa and a redundant word line WRb, a redundant data line DR and redundant memory cells RC for the same purpose are arranged in a memory block MBb. With the redundant words provided in the memory blocks MBa and MBb, when a defective word is desired to be relieved, the defective word can be relieved using a redundant word in the same block as a memory block to which the defective word belongs. For example, in the event that a word in the memory block MBa is defective, the word can be relieved by a redundant word WRa in the memory block MBa of interest. Through this, even when the defective word is replaced with the redundant word, the counter measurements against data line disturbance can also be applied to the redundant word under quite the same condition. As redundant words, memory blocks MBrd and MBrd′ dedicated to redundancy may be provided as shown in FIG. 42. [0267]
  • FIG. 43 shows an embodiment in which some memory blocks are formed into one-time programmable areas (OTP-flash). In an area formed into a one-time programmable area, only one-time write of desired data is allowed. In the figure, memory blocks MBc and MBd are memory blocks which are formed into one-time programmable areas. Structurally, the memory blocks MBc and MBd per se which are formed into one-time programmable areas are quite the same as the other memory blocks. A specified memory block can be formed into a one-time programmable area by selectively suppressing rewrite of the memory block in question. For example, a designation bit of an erase register for designating a memory block which is scheduled to be formed into a one-time programmable area is forced to assume an unselection level by means of a nonvolatile memory device and a path for supplying a write voltage to a word line of the memory block of interest is so designed as to be breakable by means of the nonvolatile memory device. Through this, the memory block formed into a one-time programmable area and the other memory blocks can have in common an X address decoder, a Y address decoder and data lines. In this case, most conveniently, a transistor similar to a memory cell transistor of the flash memory may be utilized as the nonvolatile memory device. In a write operation, source lines Vsc and Vsd of the memory blocks formed into one-time programmable areas are applied with the data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi to prevent a data line disturbance defect of these memory blocks. With some memory blocks formed into one-time programmable areas in this manner, occurrence of such a trouble that data once written is subsequently rewritten undesirably can be prevented. For example, the memory block formed into a one-time programmable area can be utilized as a program holding area or a data holding area which needs to be prevented from being altered. [0268]
  • FIG. 44 shows a configuration in which some memory blocks are formed into mask ROM's, in place of the configuration in which some memory blocks are formed into one-time programmable areas. In the figure, memory blocks MBc and MBd are areas which are formed into mask ROM's. By adopting this configuration, write of the memory blocks MBc and MBd becomes absolutely impossible. Upon write, word lines of the memory blocks MBc and MBd formed into mask ROM's are inhibited from being applied with a write high voltage and source lines Vsc and Vsd of these memory blocks are biased by a voltage such as Vddi. Upon erase, the common source lines Vsc and Vsd of the memory blocks MBc and MBd are inhibited from being applied with an erase high voltage. [0269]
  • [19] Layout Configuration of Memory Blocks [0270]
  • FIG. 45 shows an example of a layout configuration of memory blocks. The layout configuration shown in the figure is an example where a transfer gate circuit TGC is not arranged between memory blocks MBa and MBb. In the figure, a memory cell includes a [0271] control gate 11 integral with a word line, a floating gate (fg) 8 formed separately from the control gate to underlie it, a drain formed of an N type semiconductor region 13 and a P type semiconductor region 14, and a source formed of the N type semiconductor region 13 and an N type semiconductor region 15. Individual memory cells are separated from each other by a thick field insulating film 4. Word lines WL0 to WLi+2 are separated from each other and formed in parallel in the lateral direction in the figure. Data lines DL0 to DL8 are formed of a first wiring layer 23 having a first aluminum layer (Al1) and are separated from each other so as to be arranged in intersectional relation with the word lines, thus extending in parallel in the longitudinal direction in the figure. The data line is connected to the drain common to an adjacent memory cell through a contact (CONT) 22. Sources of memory cells are each formed of the N type semiconductor regions 13 and 15 and are connected every 8 bits to a source line SL formed of the first wiring layer 23 through the contact 22. The source line SL is parallel to the data lines DL0 to DL8. The source line SL in each memory block is broken at the block end so as to be disconnected from the source line SL of an adjacent memory block. Contrarily to this, the data lines DL0 to DL8 extend to pass through adjacent blocks. The source line SL in one memory block connects, at the block end, to a common source line SA or SB formed of a second wiring layer (Al2) such as a second aluminum layer through a through hole (TC) 25. The common source lines SA and SB extend in parallel to the word lines to underlie the field oxide film 4. In this manner, the source line in a unit of memory block is provided separately. The common source line SA or SB may be arranged at opposite block ends or at the center of the memory block. Though not illustrated, each word line is shunted every 16 bits to the second wiring layer 26 overlying the word line to reduce a delay component of the word line.
  • FIG. 46 shows an example of a layout configuration in which a transfer gate circuit is provided between memory blocks. The transfer gate circuit is constructed by arranging transfer MOS transistors T[0272] 0 to TB each formed of a high breakdown voltage N channel type MOS transistor having its gate electrode in the form of a first conductive layer 8 between common source lines SA and SB of adjacent memory blocks MBa and MBb. In this case, data lines are broken at adjacent ends of the memory blocks MBa and MBb. A broken end of one of the data lines having mutually opposing broken ends is connected to the drain of each of the transfer MOS transistor T0 to T8 through a contact 22 and a broken end of the other data line is connected to the source of each of the transfer MOS transistors T0 to T7 through a contact 22. A memory cell at an end of each of the opposing memory blocks is used as a dummy cell having its source being, in this example, floating. FIG. 47 shows a configuration in which the drain of a dummy cell is floating in contrast to the configuration of FIG. 46.
  • FIG. 48 shows an example of a layout configuration in which transfer MOS transistors T[0273] 0 to T7 are substantially increased in size. In this example, the gate width of each of the transfer MOS transistors T0 to T7 is increased to prevent a decrease in data line potential caused by each of the transfer MOS transistors T0 to T7. More specifically, in the example of FIG. 48, the transfer MOS transistors T0, T2, T4 and T6 are arranged on the side of a memory block MBa in parallel with word lines and the transfer MOS transistors T1, T3, T5 and T7 are arranged on the side of a memory block MBb in parallel with word lines. A data line DL0 extending from the side of memory block MBb passes above the transfer MOS transistor T1 so as to be coupled to the transfer MOS transistor T0 and a data line DL0 extending from the side of memory block MBa is coupled to the transfer MOS transistor T0. An adjacent data line DL1 extending from the side of memory block MBa passes above the transfer MOS transistor T0 so as to be coupled to the transfer MOS transistor T1 and a data line DL1 extending from the side of memory block MBb is coupled to the transfer MOS transistor T1. The other transfer MOS transistors are also coupled to data lines in a similar manner. The number of stacking of transfer MOS transistors is not limited to 2 as above but can equal the number of data lines between source lines SL at maximum.
  • [20] The Whole of a Flash Memory Applied with Countermeasures Against Data Line Disturbance [0274]
  • FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an embodiment of the whole of a flash memory applied with pluralization of memory blocks in a unit of word line and countermeasures against data line disturbance. The flash memory shown in the figure is incorporated in a microcomputer. In the figure, [0275] 210 designates a memory array in which memory cells each constructed of an insulated gate field effect transistor of two-layer gate structure as previously explained with reference to, for example, FIG. 11 are arranged in matrix. In the memory array ARY, as in the case of the configuration explained in connection with FIG. 25, memory cells have control gates connected to corresponding word lines, drain regions connected to corresponding data lines and source regions connected to source lines SL1 to SLn being each common to respective memory blocks MB1 to MBn defined each in a unit of word line. The source lines SL1 to SLn of the respective memory blocks are separately connected to erase circuits ERS1 to ERSn, respectively. In the figure, n memory blocks MB1 to MBn are shown and as exemplified in FIG. 18, these memory blocks may be divided into 7 large memory blocks (large blocks) LMB0 to LMB6 each having a relatively large storage capacity and 8 small memory blocks (small blocks) SMB0 to SMB7 each having a relatively small storage capacity. The large memory block may be used as a program storing area or a large capacity data storing area. The small memory block may be used as a small capacity data storing area.
  • In FIG. 49, 200 designates an address buffer and address latch circuit having its input coupled to an internal address bus of a microcomputer. Denoted by [0276] 201 is an X address decoder (XADEC) for driving a word line by decoding a row address signal (X address signal) latched in the address buffer and address latch circuit 200. For example, the X address decoder 201 drives a given word line with a voltage of, for example, 5V in a data read operation and drives a given word line with a high voltage of, for example, 12V in a data write operation. In a data erase operation, all outputs of the X address decoder 201 are maintained at a low voltage level of, for example, 0V. Denoted by 202 is a Y address decoder (YADEC) for decoding a Y address signal latched in the address buffer and address latch circuit 200. Denoted by 203 is a Y selection circuit (YSEL) for selecting a data line in accordance with a data line selection signal delivered out of the Y address decoder 202. The data line is related to the Y selection circuit such that one memory mat corresponds to one I/O as described with reference to FIG. 25. Though not limitedly, the memory array is divided into 16 memory mats. In this case, each of the memory blocks MB1 to MBn extends over 16 memory mats. Denoted by 204 is a sense amplifier (SAMP) for amplifying a read signal from a data line selected by the Y selection circuit 203 in a data read operation. According to the present embodiment, the sense amplifier includes 16 amplifier circuits in correspondence to output bits of the memory mats. Denoted by 205 is a data output latch (DOLAT) for holding an output of the sense amplifier 204. Denoted by 206 is a data output buffer (DOBUFF) for delivering data held in the data output latch 205 to the outside. An output of the data output buffer 206 is coupled to a 16-bit internal data bus of the microcomputer in bit correspondence relationship. According to this example, read data is of 2 bytes at maximum. Denoted by 207 is a data input buffer (DIBUFF) for fetching write data supplied from the outside. Data fetched in from the data input buffer 207 is held in a data input latch (DILAT) 208. When the data held in the data input latch 208 is “0”, a write circuit (WRIT) 209 supplies a write high voltage to a data line selected by the Y selection circuit 203. This write high voltage is supplied to the drain of a memory cell having its control gate applied with a high voltage in accordance with an X address signal, causing the memory cell of interest to be written.
  • Each of the erase circuits ERS[0277] 1 to ERSn supplies an erase high voltage to a source line of a designated memory block to perform simultaneous erase of the memory block. Which one of the erase circuits is to be caused to effect an erase operation is controlled by a setting bit of an erase block designation register 231. The erase block designation register 231 corresponds to the registers MBREG1 and MBREG2 explained with reference to FIG. 18. As described with reference to FIG. 26, the erase circuits ERS1 to ERSn are operative upon writing to apply ground potential GND to a source line of a selected block for writing and data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi to a source line of an unselected block for writing. This control is carried out by an unselected block designation circuit for writing 230. The unselected block designation circuit for writing 230 receives an X address signal delivered out of the address buffer and address latch circuit 200 and decodes the signal to decide a selected block for writing, designate the application of ground potential GND to an erase circuit associated with the selected block for writing and designate the application of data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi to an erase circuit associated with an unselected block for writing.
  • In FIG. 49, 240 designates a control circuit for performing timing control of a data read operation and selection control of various timings and voltages for write and erase. [0278]
  • FIG. 50 shows an example of the [0279] control circuit 240. The control circuit 240 has a power supply circuit 241, a memory read/write control circuit 242, a register control circuit 243 and a control register 244. The control register 244 has the program/erase control register PEREG explained in connection with FIGS. 16 and 18. The control circuit FCONT shown in FIG. 16 may be considered to correspond to the control circuit 240 and the erase block designation register 231 shown in FIG. 49. An erase signal E, a write signal W, an erase verification signal EV and a write verification signal WV correspond to an E bit, a P bit, an EV bit and a PV bit of the program/erase control register PEREG. As described with reference to FIG. 18, an erase/write operation is controlled in accordance with the contents set in the program/erase control register PEREG. On the basis of a read/write signal R/W1 and the like supplied through a control bus, the register control circuit 243 controls read/write of the program/erase control register PEREG and erase block designation register 231 (MBREG1 and MBREG2) included in the control register 244. On the basis of a read/write signal R/w2 and the like supplied through the control bus, the memory read/write control circuit 242 controls operation of the data input buffer 207, data input latch circuit 208, data output buffer 206, data output latch circuit 205, address buffer and address latch circuit 200 as well as operation of the power supply circuit 241. The power supply circuit 241 receives power supply voltage Vcc such as 5V and high voltage Vpp such as 12V and forms voltages Vpp1, VppS and Vcc1 in accordance with a setting bit of the program/erase control register PEREG included in the control register 244 and an output control signal of the memory read/write control circuit 242.
  • FIG. 51 shows an example of a circuit diagram of the [0280] power supply circuit 241. The power supply circuit 241 includes a reference voltage generation circuit 2410, a decoder drive power supply circuit 2411, a source circuit drive power supply circuit 2412 and a sense amplifier drive power supply circuit 2413. In the reference voltage generation circuit 2410, a high voltage Vpp (e.g., 12V) is divided by resistors to generate reference voltages V1 (e.g., 3.5V) and V2 (e.g., 6.5V). In accordance with the operation state of the flash memory the decoder drive power supply circuit 2411 generates voltage Vpp1 for determining a drive voltage of word line. The operation state of the flash memory is transmitted to the power supply circuit 241 by means of a control signal 2414 from the control register 244 and memory read/write control circuit 242 so that an internal switch circuit may be controlled to optimize the value of voltage Vpp1 in accordance with the operation state. An example of an output waveform of voltage Vpp1 varying with the internal operation state is shown in FIG. 52. The decoder drive power supply circuit 2411 has a detection circuit 2415 for detecting or discriminating whether the power supply voltage Vcc has a higher voltage (e.g., 5V) or a lower voltage (e.g., 3V) than the threshold voltage (e.g., 4V) and a booster circuit 2416 for boosting power supply voltage Vcc when the power supply voltage Vcc is detected as being lower than the threshold voltage. A boosted voltage is utilized when a read operation is effected with the power source voltage Vcc (such as of 3V) lower than the threshold voltage. The source circuit drive power supply circuit 2412 generates voltage VppS utilized for drive of source line in accordance with the control signal 2414. The sense amplifier drive power supply circuit 2413 generates voltage Vcc1 utilized as drive voltage of the sense amplifier in accordance with the control signal 2414. Voltage waveforms of voltages VppS and Vcc1 varying with the internal state of the flash memory are depicted in FIG. 52.
  • FIG. 53A shows an example of the [0281] X address decoder 201. In the figure, the construction corresponding to one word line is typically illustrated. The X address decoder consists of a pre-decoder 2010 for receiving an X address signal, a decode section 2011 for decoding an output of the pre-decoder and a drive section 2011 for driving a word line on the basis of an output of the decode section 2011. The pre-decoder 2010 and decode section 2011 are operated with a power supply voltage Vcc such as 5V system. The drive section 2012 is constructed as a high voltage driven system which is driven by a voltage such as the voltage Vpp1. Denoted by 2013 is a high breakdown voltage N channel type MOS transistor for separating the 5V system from the high voltage system.
  • When the transfer gate circuit TGC as described with reference to FIGS. [0282] 32 to 35 is adopted, the large memory blocks LMB0 to LMB6 shown in FIG. 16 correspond to memory blocks MB1 to MB7 of FIG. 49 and the small memory blocks SMB0 to SMB7 correspond to memory blocks MB8 to MBn of FIG. 49. In FIG. 49, the transfer gate circuit TGC is arranged between the memory blocks MB7 and MB8, though not illustrated particularly. FIG. 53B shows an example of a selection circuit 250 for generating a switching signal DT of the transfer gate circuit TGC. The selection circuit 250 receives the voltage Vpp1 from the power supply circuit 241, address signal from the address buffer 20B and write signal from the control circuit 240 to cut off the transfer gate circuit TGC upon write of the large memory blocks. In particular, the signal DT is set to 0V corresponding to ground potential upon write of the large memory block but in the other case, set to voltage Vpp1, though not limitedly.
  • FIG. 54 shows an example of the erase circuit and FIG. 55 shows its operational timing chart. Supplied to each of the erase circuits ERS[0283] 1 to ERSn is operating voltage represented by the voltage VppS and power supply voltage Vdd. Signal E/W* shown in the figure is a signal which is maintained at 0 level upon write or erase. When a bit supplied from the erase block designation register to the erase circuit of FIG. 54 is “1” level (erase designating level), erase signal E from the control circuit 240 is also rendered to be “1” level and supply voltage Vs to a source line is set to the voltage VppS. Voltage Vpps upon erase is set to Vpp as described with reference to FIG. 52. Through this, in a selected block for simultaneous erasing, simultaneous erase of memory cells can be done. When a control signal supplied from the upon-write unselected block designation circuit to the erase circuit of FIG. 54 is “1” level (level for designating an unselected block) for writing, write signal W from the control circuit 240 is also rendered to be “1” level and supply voltage Vs to the source line is set to the voltage VppS. Voltage VppS upon write is maintained at data line disturbance prevention voltage Vddi such as 3.5V. Through this, data line disturbance can be prevented in the unselected block for writing.
  • FIG. 56 shows a timing chart of a series of operations related to erase in the flash memory shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 57 shows a timing chart of a series of operations related to write in the flash memory shown in FIG. 49. Prior to giving a description of each timing chart, control signals shown in these figures will first be described. Part of the contents of the description given in connection with FIG. 16 will be repeated herein because this is considered to be necessary for facilitating understanding. Control signal FLM is a signal for designating the operation mode of the flash memory FMRY, whereby its “0” designates the first operation mode and its “1” designates the second operation mode. This signal FLM is formed on the basis of, for example, the mode signals MD[0284] 0 to MD2. Control signal MS-MiSN is a selection signal of the flash memory FMRY, whereby its “0” designates selection and its “1” designates unselection. Control signal MS-MISN is a selection signal of internal registers such as the program/erase control register PEREG and erase block designation registers MBREG1 and MBREG2. Which one of the registers is to be selected is determined by an address signal PABm. Denoted by M2RDN is a memory read strobe signal, by M2WRN is a memory write strobe signal, by MRDN is a read signal of registers built in the flash memory and MWRN is a write signal of registers built in the flash memory. The memory write strobe signal M2WRN is deemed as a strobe signal for writing data to be written in a memory cell into the data input latch DILAT. Actual write to the memory cell is started by setting a P bit of the program/erase control register PEREG.
  • A series of operations related to erase are mainly sorted into a setup erase, an erase and an erase verify as shown in FIG. 56. The setup erase consists of an operation of writing data for designation of a memory block to be erased simultaneously into the erase block designation register and an operation of writing a bit (flag) of logic “1” into an E bit of the program/erase control register PEREG. The erase is an operation of erasing a memory block simultaneously and is started by setting “1” in the E bit. The specific processing procedure of an erase operation is the same as the contents explained in connection with FIG. 22. The erase verify is started by clearing the E bit so that verify may be carried out sequentially in a unit of byte, beginning with a head address, in accordance with the contents explained in connection with FIG. 22. [0285]
  • As shown in FIG. 57, a series of operations related to write are mainly sorted into a setup program, a program and a program verify. The setup program consists of an operation of writing data to be written into the data input latch circuit, an operation of storing a memory address to be written to the address buffer and address latch circuit and an operation of writing a bit (flag) of logic “1” to a P bit of the program/erase control register PEREG. The program is an operation of writing a memory cell designated by a latched address in accordance with data written in the data input latch circuit. A specific processing procedure of a write operation is the same as the contents explained in connection with FIG. 22. The program verify is started by clearing the P bit so that verify may be carried out sequentially in a unit of byte, beginning with a head address, in accordance with the contents explained in connection with FIG. 22. [0286]
  • Operation timings shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 are essentially the same for any of the first and second operation modes and techniques described in the foregoing items [3] and [4] can be adopted. When rewrite is conducted by means of the general purpose PROM writer, part of processings can be put under the charge of the CPU built in the microcomputer and other logics by utilizing a rewrite support control program precedently prepared in the mask ROM built in the microcomputer. The flash memory shown in FIG. 49 can obviously be applied to the microcomputer MCU explained in connection with FIGS. [0287] 1 to 4 or may be constructed as a unitary flash memory chip.
  • [21] A Method for Production of a Flash Memory [0288]
  • FIGS. 58A to [0289] 58I show longitudinal sectional views of a device in the production processes of various transistors for constituting the flash memory or the microcomputer incorporating the same. Illustrated in each figure are six kinds of transistors which are, as viewed from the left in turn in each figure, a memory cell transistor of the flash memory, high breakdown voltage NMOS and PMOS used for write and erase of the flash memory, logic system NMOS and PMOS for formation of a peripheral logic such as CPU and a Zener diode used for generation of a reference voltage upon write/erase read of the flash memory.
  • (A) Process Shown in FIG. 58A [0290]
  • (1) [0291] N type wells 2 and P type wells 3 are formed in a major surface of a P type semiconductor substrate 1 through known techniques.
  • (B) Process Shown in FIG. 58B [0292]
  • (1) P type [0293] channel stopper layers 5 are formed through substantially the same process as that of thick field insulating films 4 through known techniques.
  • (2) Then first [0294] gate insulating films 6 of the high breakdown voltage NMOS (N channel type MOS transistor) and PMOS (P channel type MOS transistor) are formed. The gate insulating film 6 is so formed as to have a thickness of 30 to 50 nm by a thermal oxidization method conducted at a temperature of 850 to 950° C.
  • (C) Process Shown in FIG. 58C [0295]
  • (1) The first [0296] gate insulating film 6 is removed at an area for formation of the flash memory by using a mask such as photoresist to expose the surface of the P type semiconductor substrate 1.
  • (2) Mask materials such as photoresist are removed. [0297]
  • (D) Process Shown in FIG. 58D [0298]
  • (1) Insulating films of about 10 nm are formed (not shown) by a thermal oxidization method conducted at a temperature of 800 to 850° C. [0299]
  • (2) Then the insulating films described in (1) are removed through wet etching. Through this, contaminants which are deposited on or which intrude into the exposed surface portion of P [0300] type semiconductor substrate 1 at the area for flash memory formation when removing the mask such as photoresist in (1) of the above (C) can be removed.
  • (3) A [0301] tunnel insulating film 7 of the flash memory is newly formed. The tunnel insulating film 7 is so formed as to have a thickness of 8 to 12 nm by a thermal oxidization method conducted at a temperature of 800 to 850° C. At that time, the first gate insulating films 6 go through processes of (1) to (3) of the aforementioned (D) to have a film thickness of 20 to 40 nm.
  • (4) Subsequently, first [0302] conductive layers 8 are formed which serve as a floating gate electrode of the flash memory and gate electrodes of the high breakdown voltage NMOS and PMOS. The first conductive layer 8 is formed by diffusing phosphorus, through thermal diffusion, in polycrystalline silicon deposited to a film thickness of about 200 nm at a temperature of about 640° to provide a sheet resistance ρs=60 to 100 Ω/□. In order to reduce irregularity in erase of the flash memory, the grain size of polycrystalline silicon needs to be small and therefore the thermal diffusion is conducted at a temperature of 900° C. or less to provide a grain size of 0.1 μm or less.
  • (E) Process Shown in FIG. 58E [0303]
  • (1) An inter-layer [0304] insulating film 9 is formed between a floating gate electrode and a control gate electrode of the flash memory. The inter-layer insulating film 9 is a laminated film of a silicon oxide film and a silicon nitride film, the laminated film consisting of, as viewed from the first conductive layer 8 side, a two-layer film of silicon oxide film and silicon nitride film or a four-layer film of silicon oxide film, silicon nitride film, silicon oxide film and silicon nitride film. Here, the silicon oxide film overlying the first conductive layer 8 is formed to have a film thickness of 10 to 20 nm through thermal diffusion conducted at a temperature of 850 to 950°. The silicon nitride film overlying the silicon oxide film is formed to have a film thickness of 20 to 30 nm through CVD process. In the case of the four-layer film, the silicon oxide film on the silicon nitride film are formed to have a film thickness of 2 to 5 nm by a thermal oxidization method conducted at a temperature of 900 to 950°. The silicon nitride film overlying the silicon oxide film of 2 to 5 nm is formed to have a thickness of 10 to 15 nm through CVD process. Either of the two-layer film and four-layer film is so formed as to have a total thickness of 20 to 30 nm in terms of silicon oxide film.
  • (2) The inter-layer [0305] insulating films 9 at areas for formation of the logic system NMOS and PMOS as well as the Zener diode are removed using a mask such as photoresist.
  • (3) The mask such as photoresist is removed. [0306]
  • (4) The first [0307] gate insulating films 6 at areas for formation of the logic system NMOS and PMOS as well as the Zener diode are removed through wet etching using the uppermost silicon nitride film of the inter-layer insulating film 9 as a mask, thus exposing the surface of the P type semiconductor substrate 1.
  • (F) Process Shown in FIG. 58F [0308]
  • (1) Contaminants deposited on or intruding into the exposed portion of surface are removed through similar techniques in (1) and (2) of the above (D). At that time, an insulating film of 10 to 20 nm is formed by a thermal oxidization method conducted at 800 to 850° C. [0309]
  • (2) Then, second [0310] gate insulating films 10 serving as gate insulating films of the logic system NMOS and PMOS are formed. The second gate insulating film 10 is formed to have a thickness of 10 to 20 nm in wet atmosphere by a thermal oxidization method conducted at 800 to 850° C.
  • (3) Subsequently, second [0311] conductive layers 11 are formed which serve as a control gate electrode of the flash memory and gate electrodes of the logic system NMOS and PMOS. The second conductive layer has a laminated structure of polycrystalline silicon film, high melting point metal silicide film and silicon oxide film which are laminated one after another in this order from the bottom. Used as the polycrystalline silicon film is a film having a sheet resistance ρs=60 to 100 Ω/□ formed by diffusing, through thermal diffusion at 900° C. or less, phosphorous in polycrystalline silicon of a film thickness of 100 to 200 nm deposited at about 640° C. The high melting point metal silicide film is a WSix film (x=2.5 to 3.0) formed through CVD process or sputtering process to have a film thickness of 100 to 150 nm and a sheet resistance ρs=2 to 15 Ω/□ after heat treatment. The silicon oxide film is formed through CVD process to have a thickness of 100 to 150 nm. This silicon oxide film is a protective film for the polycrystalline silicon film and high melting point metal silicide film serving as an actual control gate electrode or a gate electrode and protects high melting point metal from damage such as ion implantation or dry etching.
  • (4) The [0312] control gate electrode 11, inter-layer insulating film 9 and floating gate electrode 8 of the flash memory are formed in self-align fashion through dry etching using a mask such as photoresist.
  • (5) The [0313] tunnel insulating film 7 suffering from damage through dry etching in the above (4) is removed through wet etching using the first and second conductive layers 8 and 11 as a mask to expose the surface of P type semiconductor substrate 1 at regions for formation of source and drain of the flash memory.
  • (6) Then an insulating [0314] film 12 is formed over the entire surface. The insulating film 12 is a protective film which is a silicon oxide film formed to have a thickness of 10 to 20 nm through CVD process.
  • (7) An N [0315] type semiconductor region 13 and a P type semiconductor layer 14 are formed at source and drain regions of the flash memory by using the second conductive layer 11 as a mask. Here, the N type semiconductor region 13 is formed by injecting arsenic by about 1×1015 cm−2 at 50 to 80 keV accelerating energy through ion implantation process. The P type semiconductor layer 14 is formed by injecting boron by 1×1013 to 1×1014 cm−2 at 20 to 60 kev accelerating energy through ion implantation process.
  • (G) Process Shown in FIG. 58G [0316]
  • (1) Gate electrodes of the logic system NMOS and PMOS are formed through dry etching using a mask such as photoresist. During the etching, the flash memory region, which is covered with the mask, is not etched. The second [0317] conductive layers 11 at areas unnecessary for formation of the high breakdown voltage NMOS and PMOS and at the area for formation of the Zener diode are removed.
  • (2) After the mask such as photoresist is removed, the high melting point metal silicide of the second [0318] conductive layer 11 is rendered to have a low resistance (sheet resistance ρs=2 to 15 Ω/□) through a heat treatment at about 900 to 950° C.
  • (3) Subsequently, an N [0319] type semiconductor region 15 is formed at the source region of the flash memory by using a mask such as photoresist. The N type semiconductor region is formed by injecting phosphorous by about 5×10 cm−2 at 50 to 80 kev accelerating energy through ion implantation.
  • (4) Then, the N [0320] type semiconductor region 15 is thermally diffused through a heat treatment conducted at about 950° C. for about 30 minutes to 2 hours to cover the source region of the P type semiconductor layer 14. Thus, the drain region has a two-layer structure of the N type semiconductor region 13 and the P type semiconductor layer 14 for improving threshold control and write efficiency. The source region has a two-layer structure of the N type semiconductor region 13 based on arsenic and the N type semiconductor region 15 based on phosphorous for improving source breakdown voltage upon erase. When sector erase is used for erasing wherein a control gate electrode (word line) 11 of the flash memory is applied with a negative bias relative to the P type semiconductor substrate 1 and erase is effected over the entire channel region under the floating gate electrode 8, the formation of the N type semiconductor region 15 on the side of source is unneeded.
  • (5) An N [0321] type semiconductor region 16 is formed by injecting phosphorous by 2 to 4×1013 cm−2 at 50 kev accelerating energy through ion implantation process using a mask such as photoresist.
  • (6) A P [0322] type semiconductor region 17 is formed over the entire surface by injecting boron by 1 to 2×1013 cm−2 through ion implantation process. Boron is also injected into the NMOS region but this region has high concentration of phosphorous and therefore is allowed to substantially act as an N type semiconductor.
  • (H) Process Shown in FIG. 58H [0323]
  • (1) After a silicon oxide film is formed over the entire surface through CVD process, a [0324] side wall 18 is formed through dry etching.
  • (2) Through ion implantation process using a mask such as photoresist, an N type semiconductor region is formed by injecting arsenic by 1 to 5×10[0325] 15 cm−2 at 60 kev accelerating energy and a P type semiconductor region 20 is formed by injecting boron by 1 to 2×1015 cm−2 at 15 kev accelerating energy. A Zener diode is formed of the N type semiconductor region 19 and P type semiconductor region 20, having a Zener voltage of 3 to 4V.
  • (I) Process Shown in FIG. 58I [0326]
  • (1) An insulating [0327] film 21 is formed. The insulating film 21 is formed of a silicon oxide film of about 150 nm film thickness and a BPSG film of 400 to 500 nm film thickness which are prepared through CVD process.
  • (2) After a [0328] contact hole 22 is formed, a first wiring layer 23 is formed. The first wiring layer 23 is formed of a laminated film of high melting point metal silicide and aluminum. The first wiring layer 23 is also used as a data line and a source line of the flash memory.
  • (3) An insulating [0329] film 24 is formed on the first wiring layer 23. The insulating film 24 is a laminated film of a silicon oxide film/spin-on-glass film prepared through plasma CVD process and a silicon oxide film prepared through plasma CVD process.
  • (4) After a through [0330] hole 25 is formed, a second wiring layer 26 is formed. The second wiring layer 26 has the same film structure as the first wiring layer 23. The second wiring layer 26 is used for shunting the second conductive layers 11 serving as word lines of the flash memory.
  • (5) A [0331] final passivation film 27 is formed to end in completion. The final passivation film 27 is a laminated film of a silicon oxide film prepared through CVD process or plasma CVD process and a silicon nitride film prepared through plasma CVD process.
  • [22] A Semiconductor Substrate/Well Structure Meeting Sector Erase [0332]
  • Technical consideration to be paid to erasing the flash memory is voltage conditions as shown in FIG. 59. If, in the case of employment of sector erase (the control electrode is applied with a negative bias relative to the semiconductor substrate), a circuit for generation of the negative bias is complicated, the control gate electrode=GND and the substrate=positive bias are set up to thereby perform substantial negative bias erase. In this case, a portion of substrate at an area for formation of the flash memory needs to be separated. A semiconductor substrate/well structure for this purpose will be described with reference to FIGS. [0333] 60 to 62.
  • (A) Structure Shown in FIG. 60 [0334]
  • [0335] N type wells 2 and P type wells 3 are formed in a major surface of an N type semiconductor substrate 101 to accomplish separation. To this end, as shown in FIG. 67, the N type semiconductor substrate 101 is used in place of the P type semiconductor substrate 1.
  • (B) Structure Shown in FIG. 62 [0336]
  • A double well structure (P type well [0337] 3/N type well 2/P type semiconductor substrate 1) is used for separation. In this case,
  • (1) An N type well [0338] 2 is formed in a major surface of the P type semiconductor substrate 1. At that time, an N type well 2 is also formed at an area for formation of the flash memory and besides,
  • (2) The P type well [0339] 3 is made to be more shallow than the N type well 2.
  • (C) Structure Shown in FIG. 62 [0340]
  • A double well structure (P type well [0341] 3/N type well 102/P type semiconductor substrate 1) is used for separation. In this case,
  • (1) A deep N type well [0342] 102 is formed in a major surface of a P type semiconductor substrate 1 at an area for formation of the flash memory, and
  • (2) The production is subsequently carried out in the same manner as in the case of FIG. 60. [0343]
  • The following operation and effect can be brought about by the foregoing embodiments. [0344]
  • (1) When information is initially written in the flash memory FMRY built in the microcomputer MCU before the microcomputer MCU is mounted on a given system, the information can be written efficiently under the control of an external write device such as PROM writer PRW by designating the second operation mode. Also, by designating the first operation mode to the microcomputer MCU, information stored in the flash memory FMRY can be rewritten with the microcomputer MCU mounted on the system. At that time, the rewrite time can be reduced by the simultaneous erase function. [0345]
  • (2) By providing a plurality of memory blocks (LMB, SMB) having mutually different storage capacities, each as a simultaneously erasable unit, in the flash memory FMRY, programs, data tables and control data, for example, can be held in each memory block in accordance its storage capacity. More particularly, data of a relatively large amount of information can be written in a memory block having a relatively large storage capacity and data of a relatively small amount of information can be written in a memory block having a relatively small storage capacity. In other words, a memory block of a storage capacity meeting an amount of information to be stored can be utilized. Accordingly, such inconvenience in that a memory, although sufficing for a program, cannot be easily used as a data area because of an excessively large erase unit can be prevented. Further, even when a given memory block is erased simultaneously for rewrite of part of information held in the flash memory, such wastefulness that information is erased together with a group of information which need not substantially be rewritten and thereafter the information group is again written can be prevented as far as possible. [0346]
  • (3) Of the plurality of memory blocks, a memory block having a storage capacity which is set to be smaller than that of a built-in RAM can be provided so that the built-in RAM may be used as a working area or a data buffer area for rewrite of that memory block. [0347]
  • (4) When in the above (3) the flash memory is rewritten with the microcomputer mounted, information in the memory block to be rewritten is transferred to the built-in RAM, only partial information to be rewritten is received from the outside and rewritten on the RAM and then rewrite of the flash memory is carried out, thereby ensuring that information held internally in advance of rewrite and not required to be rewritten need not be transferred additionally from the outside and wastefulness of information transfer for partial rewrite of the memory block can be eliminated. [0348]
  • (5) In the flash memory, the simultaneous erase time is not-so short even for a small memory block and consequently the flash memory per se cannot be rewritten on real time base in synchronism with a control operation by the microcomputer MCU. But by utilizing the built-in RAM as a working area or a data buffer area for rewrite of a memory block, the same data as that rewritten on real time base can eventually be obtained in the memory block. [0349]
  • (6) By incorporating in the flash memory FMRY a register MBREG in which information for designating a memory block to be erased simultaneously is held rewritably, a memory block to be erased simultaneously can be designated internally and externally of the microcomputer MCU (built-in central processing unit, external PROM writer) with ease in accordance with the same procedure. [0350]
  • (7) Thanks to the aforementioned operation and effect, ease of use of the flash memory FMRY built in the microcomputer MCU can be improved. [0351]
  • (8) As shown in FIG. 24, one bit of input/output data corresponds to one memory mat. By employing this one memory mat per one I/O structure, a common data line CD can be separated at each memory mat and need not extend over a long distance which passes through all of the memory mats, so that parasitic capacitance associated with the common data line can be reduced to contribute to speed-up of access and a low voltage operation. [0352]
  • (9) By defining memory blocks each in a unit of word line, the minimum memory block in the whole of memory array ARY has a storage capacity corresponding to that of one word line. This holds true regardless of the number of parallel input/output bits of the flash memory. Accordingly, by defining memory blocks each in a unit of word line, the storage capacity of the minimum memory block can be made to be small more easily and especially, in the case of a memory which is built in a microcomputer and in which input/output of data is effected in a unit of byte or word, the minimum size of memory block can be reduced drastically. Through this, ease of use of the flash memory built in the microcomputer can further be improved, thus contributing to improvement in efficiency of rewrite of small scale data in a unit of memory block. [0353]
  • (10) As shown in FIG. 26, when voltage Vddi such as 3.5V is applied to the source of a memory cell in an unselected block for writing to raise potential on the side of source, data line disturbance which decreases the threshold of a memory cell transistor can be prevented. [0354]
  • (11) For prevention of the data line disturbance, it is effective to minimize the data line disturbance time. In this case, the data line disturbance time affecting a small memory block owing to write concomitant with rewrite of a memory block of a large memory capacity is relatively longer as compared to the converse case. By taking advantage of this fact, with respect to the intervening transfer gate circuit TGC, memory blocks MBb on the side of the Y selection circuit YSEL are formed of large memory blocks having relatively large storage capacities and memory blocks MBa on the opposite side are formed of small memory blocks having relatively small storage capacities. Through this, the data line disturbance time affecting memory cells of a memory block MBb owing to write of a memory block MBa can be far more decreased in the case where the memory blocks MBa are small memory blocks and the memory blocks MBb are large memory blocks than in the case where the memory blocks MBa are otherwise large memory blocks and the memory blocks MBb are otherwise small memory blocks. In this manner, prevention of erroneous operations due to data line disturbance can further be perfected. [0355]
  • (12) By arranging dummy word lines DWA and DWB and dummy cells DC[0356] 0 to DC6 at opposing ends of memory blocks which are separated by the transfer gate circuit TGC, irregularity in dimensions of word lines and control gates near the transfer gate circuit TGC can be reduced.
  • The invention achieved by the present inventors has been described specifically on the basis of embodiments but the present invention is not limited thereto and may obviously be changed in various ways without departing from the gist of the invention. [0357]
  • For example, the peripheral circuits incorporated in the microcomputer are not limited to those in the forgoing embodiments but may be changed suitably. Memory cell transistors of the flash memory are not limited to MOS transistors of stacked gate structure in the foregoing embodiments and memory cell transistors of FLOTOX type using a tunnel phenomenon also in a write operation can also be used. In the foregoing embodiments, controlling of both of erase and write of the flash memory is realized by way of software means as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 but the invention is not limited thereto and for example, simultaneous erase requiring relatively much time may be controlled by dedicated hardware built in the flash memory. For example, the dedicated hardware includes control logic for controlling setting and clear of E bit and EV bit and for performing verify of the erase state. The incorporation of the control logic for simultaneous erase into the flash memory can, on the one hand, improve ease of use by the user in that software load concerning simultaneous erase can be mitigated but on the other hand increases the area of the control logic. As for the contents of items [1] to [7], in addition to a memory block in which the unit of simultaneous erase is effected in a unit of common source line, a memory block may be used in which the word line is used as a common line in erase. Which one of the memory blocks is to be selected can be determined by taking into consideration circumstances of what polarity of erase voltage is used or which one of the number of memory cells connected to a single word line and the number of memory cells connected to a single data line is smaller when the storage capacity of simultaneous erase unit is to be minimized. The size of memory block is not limited to the fixed size in the foregoing embodiments. For example, the size can be varied in accordance with setting of the control register or designation by the mode signal. For example, when simultaneous erase voltage is applied to a word line defined as a minimum unit, the operation of the driver for driving the word line with the erase voltage can be selected in accordance with the setting of the control register or the designation by the mode signal. Further, as for the division of memory blocks, the whole may be divided into a plurality of large blocks LMB[0358] 0 to LMB7 and each large block may be divided into a plurality of small blocks SMB0 to SMB7 as shown in FIG. 24, whereby simultaneous erase can be done in a unit of large block or in a unit of small block. In a memory cell transistor of the flash memory, its source and drain are relatively defined in accordance with voltages applied thereto.
  • The present invention can be applied widely to a flash memory in which write can be done by effecting simultaneous erase in a unit of at least memory block and to a microcomputer conditioned by comprising, on a single semiconductor chip, a central processing unit and a flash memory which is electrically rewritable. [0359]

Claims (11)

1-26. (Canceled)
27. A microcomputer on a semiconductor substrate comprising:
a processor unit;
an electrically erasable and programmable flash memory;
a random access memory; and
an overlap indicating circuit,
wherein the overlap indicating circuit indicates that a predetermined address area of the flash memory is overlapped with a predetermined address area of the random access memory, and
wherein when the overlap indicating circuit indicates the overlap during performing a system operation of the microcomputer, the random access memory is accessed by the predetermined address of the flash memory and the data stored in the flash memory is tuned.
28. A microcomputer according to claim 27,
wherein the flash memory includes a plurality of memory blocks each of which contains memory cells arranged so as to be simultaneously erasable, and
wherein a first memory block in the plurality of memory blocks contains a memory capacity not larger than a memory capacity of the random access memory and the predetermined address area of the flash memory is an address area of the first memory block.
29. A microcomputer according to claim 28,
wherein the processor unit performs a write control program stored in the flash memory, and
wherein the write control program includes modification of addresses of the predetermined address area of the random address memory such that the modified addresses overlap those of the first memory block, writing of information in the predetermined area of the random access memory, restoration of the modified addresses of the predetermined area of the random access memory to its former addresses after the information writing, and rewriting of the first memory block with the information written in the predetermined area of the random access memory whose addresses have been restored.
30. A microcomputer according to claim 29,
wherein the write control program further includes transferring data stored in the first memory block to the predetermined address area of the random access memory.
31. A microcomputer comprising:
a processor unit;
an electrically erasable and programmable flash memory; and
a random access memory,
wherein the electrically erasable and programmable flash memory includes a plurality of memory blocks,
wherein a first of the plurality of memory blocks is accessed by an address included in a first address area,
wherein the random access memory is accessed by an address included in a second address area, different from the first address area, in a first mode and is accessed by an address included in the first address area in a second mode, and
wherein the microprocessor changes an operation mode from the first mode to the second mode while the processor unit performs a program stored in the electrically erasable and programmable flash memory.
32. A microcomputer according to claim 31,
wherein the microprocessor changes the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode after transferring first data stored in the first memory block to the random access memory, and
wherein the microprocessor modifies first data stored in the random access memory by using an address included in the first address area in the second mode.
33. A microcomputer according to claim 31,
wherein a memory capacity of the first memory block is not larger than the memory capacity of the random access memory.
34. A microcomputer according to claim 31,
wherein when first data stored in the first memory block is modified, the processor unit performs transferring the first data from the first memory block to the random access memory, changing the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode, modifying the first data by using an address included in the first address area, changing the operation mode from the second mode to the first mode, and transferring the first data to the first memory block.
35. A microcomputer according to claim 31,
wherein memory cells of the first memory block are arranged so as to be simultaneously erasable.
36. A microcomputer according to claim 31,
wherein the random access memory includes an address decode logic,
wherein the address decode logic decodes an address included in the second address area in the first mode and an address included in the first address area in the second mode, and
wherein the changing of the operation mode between the first and second modes is performed by setting a flag or a control bit from the processor unit.
US10/898,333 1992-03-17 2004-07-26 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein Expired - Fee Related US6999350B2 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/898,333 US6999350B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2004-07-26 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US11/245,338 US7184321B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2005-10-07 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US11/657,473 US7295476B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2007-01-25 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US11/860,762 US7505329B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2007-09-25 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US12/320,679 US7965563B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2009-02-02 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein

Applications Claiming Priority (13)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP04-091919 1992-03-17
JP9191992A JPH05266219A (en) 1992-03-17 1992-03-17 Microcomputer
JP04-093908 1992-03-19
JP09390892A JP3534781B2 (en) 1992-03-19 1992-03-19 Microcomputer and flash memory
US3187793A 1993-03-16 1993-03-16
US08/473,114 US5768194A (en) 1992-03-17 1995-06-07 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US08/788,198 US6026020A (en) 1992-03-17 1997-01-24 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US09/144,194 US6064593A (en) 1992-03-17 1998-08-31 Semiconductor integrated circuit device having an electrically erasable and programmable nonvolatile memory and a built-in processing unit
US09/414,944 US6166953A (en) 1992-03-17 1999-10-08 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US09/705,835 US6335879B1 (en) 1992-03-17 2000-11-06 Method of erasing and programming a flash memory in a single-chip microcomputer having a processing unit and memory
US09/987,957 US6493271B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2001-11-16 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US10/252,438 US6804152B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2002-09-24 Method for manufacturing a printed board on which a semiconductor device having two modes is mounted
US10/898,333 US6999350B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2004-07-26 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/252,438 Continuation US6804152B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2002-09-24 Method for manufacturing a printed board on which a semiconductor device having two modes is mounted

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/245,338 Continuation US7184321B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2005-10-07 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20040268025A1 true US20040268025A1 (en) 2004-12-30
US6999350B2 US6999350B2 (en) 2006-02-14

Family

ID=26433348

Family Applications (17)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US08/473,114 Expired - Lifetime US5768194A (en) 1992-03-17 1995-06-07 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US08/520,721 Expired - Lifetime US5581503A (en) 1992-03-17 1995-07-31 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US08/788,198 Expired - Lifetime US6026020A (en) 1992-03-17 1997-01-24 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US09/144,194 Expired - Lifetime US6064593A (en) 1992-03-17 1998-08-31 Semiconductor integrated circuit device having an electrically erasable and programmable nonvolatile memory and a built-in processing unit
US09/414,170 Expired - Lifetime US6130836A (en) 1992-03-17 1999-10-08 Semiconductor IC device having a control register for designating memory blocks for erasure
US09/414,944 Expired - Lifetime US6166953A (en) 1992-03-17 1999-10-08 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US09/435,037 Expired - Lifetime US6181598B1 (en) 1992-03-17 1999-11-05 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory
US09/705,835 Expired - Fee Related US6335879B1 (en) 1992-03-17 2000-11-06 Method of erasing and programming a flash memory in a single-chip microcomputer having a processing unit and memory
US09/987,957 Expired - Fee Related US6493271B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2001-11-16 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US09/987,958 Expired - Fee Related US6400609B1 (en) 1992-03-17 2001-11-16 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US10/158,901 Expired - Fee Related US6690603B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2002-06-03 Microcomputer including a flash memory that is two-way programmable
US10/252,438 Expired - Fee Related US6804152B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2002-09-24 Method for manufacturing a printed board on which a semiconductor device having two modes is mounted
US10/898,333 Expired - Fee Related US6999350B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2004-07-26 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US11/245,338 Expired - Fee Related US7184321B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2005-10-07 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US11/657,473 Expired - Fee Related US7295476B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2007-01-25 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US11/860,762 Expired - Fee Related US7505329B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2007-09-25 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US12/320,679 Expired - Fee Related US7965563B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2009-02-02 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein

Family Applications Before (12)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US08/473,114 Expired - Lifetime US5768194A (en) 1992-03-17 1995-06-07 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US08/520,721 Expired - Lifetime US5581503A (en) 1992-03-17 1995-07-31 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US08/788,198 Expired - Lifetime US6026020A (en) 1992-03-17 1997-01-24 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US09/144,194 Expired - Lifetime US6064593A (en) 1992-03-17 1998-08-31 Semiconductor integrated circuit device having an electrically erasable and programmable nonvolatile memory and a built-in processing unit
US09/414,170 Expired - Lifetime US6130836A (en) 1992-03-17 1999-10-08 Semiconductor IC device having a control register for designating memory blocks for erasure
US09/414,944 Expired - Lifetime US6166953A (en) 1992-03-17 1999-10-08 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US09/435,037 Expired - Lifetime US6181598B1 (en) 1992-03-17 1999-11-05 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory
US09/705,835 Expired - Fee Related US6335879B1 (en) 1992-03-17 2000-11-06 Method of erasing and programming a flash memory in a single-chip microcomputer having a processing unit and memory
US09/987,957 Expired - Fee Related US6493271B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2001-11-16 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US09/987,958 Expired - Fee Related US6400609B1 (en) 1992-03-17 2001-11-16 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US10/158,901 Expired - Fee Related US6690603B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2002-06-03 Microcomputer including a flash memory that is two-way programmable
US10/252,438 Expired - Fee Related US6804152B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2002-09-24 Method for manufacturing a printed board on which a semiconductor device having two modes is mounted

Family Applications After (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/245,338 Expired - Fee Related US7184321B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2005-10-07 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US11/657,473 Expired - Fee Related US7295476B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2007-01-25 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US11/860,762 Expired - Fee Related US7505329B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2007-09-25 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US12/320,679 Expired - Fee Related US7965563B2 (en) 1992-03-17 2009-02-02 Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (17) US5768194A (en)
EP (4) EP0902436B1 (en)
KR (1) KR100276474B1 (en)
DE (4) DE69333151T2 (en)
TW (1) TW231343B (en)

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050154582A1 (en) * 2003-12-19 2005-07-14 Oce-Technologies B.V. Erasing a stored information pattern on a storage medium
EP1865554A1 (en) * 2006-06-09 2007-12-12 Austriamicrosystems AG Semiconductor memory device and method for operation
US20070297245A1 (en) * 2006-06-22 2007-12-27 Nima Mokhlesi System for non-real time reprogramming of non-volatile memory to achieve tighter distribution of threshold voltages
US20070297241A1 (en) * 2006-06-21 2007-12-27 Macronix International Co., Ltd. Method and Structure for Operating Memory Devices on Fringes of Control Gate
US20070297226A1 (en) * 2006-06-22 2007-12-27 Nima Mokhlesi Method for non-real time reprogramming of non-volatile memory to achieve tighter distribution of threshold voltages
US20070297240A1 (en) * 2006-06-21 2007-12-27 Macronix International Co., Ltd. Methods and Structures for Expanding a Memory Operation Window and Reducing a Second Bit Effect
US20090265792A1 (en) * 2008-04-21 2009-10-22 Martinez Ricardo L Memory security override protection for manufacturability of information handling systems
US8069328B2 (en) * 2006-03-28 2011-11-29 Mosaid Technologies Incorporated Daisy chain cascade configuration recognition technique
US10359961B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2019-07-23 Toshiba Memory Corporation Storage device
US20200142606A1 (en) * 2015-11-06 2020-05-07 SK Hynix Inc. Memory device and method of operating the same

Families Citing this family (250)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6347051B2 (en) * 1991-11-26 2002-02-12 Hitachi, Ltd. Storage device employing a flash memory
US6414878B2 (en) * 1992-03-17 2002-07-02 Hitachi, Ltd. Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
TW231343B (en) 1992-03-17 1994-10-01 Hitachi Seisakusyo Kk
US7057937B1 (en) 1992-03-17 2006-06-06 Renesas Technology Corp. Data processing apparatus having a flash memory built-in which is rewritable by use of external device
US5687345A (en) * 1992-03-17 1997-11-11 Hitachi, Ltd. Microcomputer having CPU and built-in flash memory that is rewritable under control of the CPU analyzing a command supplied from an external device
JPH0728772A (en) 1993-06-25 1995-01-31 Hitachi Ltd Microcomputer
US6006304A (en) * 1993-06-25 1999-12-21 Hitachi, Ltd. Apparatus and method for calculating an erasure time for data stored in a flash memory
US5719065A (en) * 1993-10-01 1998-02-17 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for manufacturing semiconductor device with removable spacers
US5814529A (en) 1995-01-17 1998-09-29 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for producing a semiconductor integrated circuit including a thin film transistor and a capacitor
JPH08212185A (en) * 1995-01-31 1996-08-20 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Microcomputer
US5606532A (en) * 1995-03-17 1997-02-25 Atmel Corporation EEPROM array with flash-like core
US6728851B1 (en) * 1995-07-31 2004-04-27 Lexar Media, Inc. Increasing the memory performance of flash memory devices by writing sectors simultaneously to multiple flash memory devices
US5845313A (en) 1995-07-31 1998-12-01 Lexar Direct logical block addressing flash memory mass storage architecture
US8171203B2 (en) * 1995-07-31 2012-05-01 Micron Technology, Inc. Faster write operations to nonvolatile memory using FSInfo sector manipulation
US6978342B1 (en) 1995-07-31 2005-12-20 Lexar Media, Inc. Moving sectors within a block of information in a flash memory mass storage architecture
JP3560266B2 (en) * 1995-08-31 2004-09-02 株式会社ルネサステクノロジ Semiconductor device and semiconductor data device
DE19545557A1 (en) * 1995-12-06 1997-06-12 Siemens Ag Read-only memory and method for controlling the same
JPH09212411A (en) * 1996-02-06 1997-08-15 Tokyo Electron Ltd Memory system
US5867394A (en) * 1996-03-01 1999-02-02 The Standard Register Company Document dispenser operational program downloading
JPH1049439A (en) * 1996-03-26 1998-02-20 Robert Bosch Gmbh Operating method for controller
US5774545A (en) * 1996-03-28 1998-06-30 Lucent Technologies Inc. Method and apparatus for enhancing security in and discouraging theft of VLSI and ULSI devices
KR100568641B1 (en) * 1996-04-11 2006-04-07 가부시끼가이샤 히다치 세이사꾸쇼 Disk drive
US6073204A (en) * 1997-04-23 2000-06-06 Micron Technology, Inc. Memory system having flexible architecture and method
US5854944A (en) * 1996-05-09 1998-12-29 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for determining wait states on a per cycle basis in a data processing system
JPH09320282A (en) * 1996-05-27 1997-12-12 Sharp Corp Erasing control method for nonvolatile semiconductor memory device
TW334581B (en) * 1996-06-04 1998-06-21 Handotai Energy Kenkyusho Kk Semiconductor integrated circuit and fabrication method thereof
EP0825530A3 (en) * 1996-06-20 2004-06-02 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Computer apparatus having electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory, and nonvolatile semiconductor memory
DE69627318T2 (en) * 1996-08-22 2004-02-12 Stmicroelectronics S.R.L., Agrate Brianza Multi-level non-volatile memory device
US5912837A (en) * 1996-10-28 1999-06-15 Micron Technology, Inc. Bitline disturb reduction
US6493788B1 (en) 1996-10-28 2002-12-10 Macronix International Co., Ltd. Processor with embedded in-circuit programming structures
US6282675B1 (en) 1997-08-06 2001-08-28 Macronix International Co., Ltd. Fault-tolerant architecture for in-circuit programming
US6842820B2 (en) 1997-10-03 2005-01-11 Macronix International Co., Ltd. Processor with embedded in-circuit programming structures
JP3773607B2 (en) * 1996-11-28 2006-05-10 Necエレクトロニクス株式会社 Microcomputer with built-in flash EEPROM
JPH10177797A (en) * 1996-12-17 1998-06-30 Toshiba Corp Semiconductor memory
US5723355A (en) * 1997-01-17 1998-03-03 Programmable Microelectronics Corp. Method to incorporate non-volatile memory and logic components into a single sub-0.3 micron fabrication process for embedded non-volatile memory
KR100251636B1 (en) * 1997-04-10 2000-05-01 윤종용 Memory device for connecting in a accordance with scsi
US6252799B1 (en) * 1997-04-11 2001-06-26 Programmable Silicon Solutions Device with embedded flash and EEPROM memories
KR100476293B1 (en) * 1997-04-15 2005-06-08 유티스타콤코리아 유한회사 Method of verifying and testing whether a memory is mounted on a board incorporating a mc683 series
JPH10326493A (en) 1997-05-23 1998-12-08 Ricoh Co Ltd Compounded flash memory device
JPH10333898A (en) * 1997-05-29 1998-12-18 Nec Corp Microcomputer
JP3189740B2 (en) * 1997-06-20 2001-07-16 日本電気株式会社 Data repair method for nonvolatile semiconductor memory
US6226708B1 (en) * 1997-08-18 2001-05-01 Texas Instruments Incorporated Method and system for efficiently programming non-volatile memory
US6385689B1 (en) * 1998-02-06 2002-05-07 Analog Devices, Inc. Memory and a data processor including a memory
EP0935195A2 (en) 1998-02-06 1999-08-11 Analog Devices, Inc. "An integrated circuit with a high resolution analog-to-digital converter, a microcontroller and high density memory and an emulator for an integrated circuit
US6701395B1 (en) 1998-02-06 2004-03-02 Analog Devices, Inc. Analog-to-digital converter that preseeds memory with channel identifier data and makes conversions at fixed rate with direct memory access
US6289300B1 (en) 1998-02-06 2001-09-11 Analog Devices, Inc. Integrated circuit with embedded emulator and emulation system for use with such an integrated circuit
TW407364B (en) * 1998-03-26 2000-10-01 Toshiba Corp Memory apparatus, card type memory apparatus, and electronic apparatus
IT1298819B1 (en) * 1998-03-27 2000-02-02 Sgs Thomson Microelectronics SWITCHING CIRCUIT
JP3559166B2 (en) * 1998-06-15 2004-08-25 三菱電機株式会社 Automotive control device
ITMI981564A1 (en) * 1998-07-09 2000-01-09 St Microelectronics Srl NON-VOLATILE MEMORY ABLE TO RUN A PROGRAM INDEPENDENTLY
EP1125323A1 (en) * 1998-09-29 2001-08-22 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Deposition of oxide layer on the gate
EP0991081B1 (en) * 1998-09-30 2005-11-30 STMicroelectronics S.r.l. Emulated EEPROM memory device and corresponding method
EP1005079B1 (en) 1998-11-26 2012-12-26 STMicroelectronics Srl Process for integrating in a same chip a non-volatile memory and a high-performance logic circuitry
JP2000173279A (en) * 1998-12-02 2000-06-23 Nec Corp Non-volatile semiconductor storage device and its erasure verifying method
JP2000251035A (en) * 1999-02-26 2000-09-14 Hitachi Ltd Memory card
WO2001020458A1 (en) * 1999-09-13 2001-03-22 Advanced Technology Materials, Inc. A single chip embedded microcontroller having multiple non-volatile erasable proms sharing a single high voltage generator
KR100375217B1 (en) * 1999-10-21 2003-03-07 삼성전자주식회사 Microcontroller incorporating an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory
US6640262B1 (en) * 1999-12-20 2003-10-28 3Com Corporation Method and apparatus for automatically configuring a configurable integrated circuit
GB2357602A (en) * 1999-12-22 2001-06-27 Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd Memory controller for a memory array comprising different memory types
FR2803080A1 (en) * 1999-12-22 2001-06-29 St Microelectronics Sa PAGE-BY-PAGE PROGRAMMABLE FLASH MEMORY
US6426893B1 (en) 2000-02-17 2002-07-30 Sandisk Corporation Flash eeprom system with simultaneous multiple data sector programming and storage of physical block characteristics in other designated blocks
JP3872927B2 (en) * 2000-03-22 2007-01-24 株式会社東芝 Booster circuit
EP1139419A1 (en) 2000-03-29 2001-10-04 STMicroelectronics S.r.l. Method of manufacturing an electrically programmable, non-volatile memory with logic circuitry
JP2001357023A (en) * 2000-06-14 2001-12-26 Seiko Epson Corp Semiconductor integrated circuit and method for writing into nonvolatile memory built therein
NO20004236L (en) * 2000-08-24 2002-02-25 Thin Film Electronics Asa Non-volatile passive matrix device and method for reading the same
JP2002025282A (en) 2000-07-12 2002-01-25 Hitachi Ltd Non-volatile semiconductor storage device
US7167944B1 (en) 2000-07-21 2007-01-23 Lexar Media, Inc. Block management for mass storage
US6266273B1 (en) * 2000-08-21 2001-07-24 Sandisk Corporation Method and structure for reliable data copy operation for non-volatile memories
US6567289B1 (en) * 2000-08-23 2003-05-20 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Physical memory layout with various sized memory sectors
JP2002073425A (en) * 2000-08-31 2002-03-12 Hitachi Ltd Reproducing unit for medium
US20020044486A1 (en) * 2000-10-16 2002-04-18 Cheng-Sheng Chan IC card with different page sizes to increase endurance
US6834331B1 (en) 2000-10-24 2004-12-21 Starfish Software, Inc. System and method for improving flash memory data integrity
DE10101034A1 (en) * 2001-01-11 2002-08-01 Jumptec Ind Computertechnik Ag Data communication system and data conversion device
US6449209B1 (en) * 2001-01-19 2002-09-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Semiconductor memory device comprising more than two internal banks of different sizes
US6344994B1 (en) * 2001-01-31 2002-02-05 Advanced Micro Devices Data retention characteristics as a result of high temperature bake
EP1229550B1 (en) * 2001-02-05 2009-09-30 STMicroelectronics S.r.l. Method of erasing a flash memory
JP2002269065A (en) 2001-03-08 2002-09-20 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Microcomputer with incorporated programmable nonvolatile memory
US6452836B1 (en) 2001-03-09 2002-09-17 Micron Technology, Inc. Non-volatile memory device with erase cycle register
US6549467B2 (en) * 2001-03-09 2003-04-15 Micron Technology, Inc. Non-volatile memory device with erase address register
JP4230122B2 (en) * 2001-03-30 2009-02-25 株式会社ルネサステクノロジ Microcomputer, writing method and erasing method
US6490202B2 (en) * 2001-04-06 2002-12-03 Micron Technology, Inc. Non-volatile memory device with erase register
FR2824650A1 (en) * 2001-05-10 2002-11-15 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTING ACCESS TO MEMORIES
JP4049297B2 (en) * 2001-06-11 2008-02-20 株式会社ルネサステクノロジ Semiconductor memory device
DE10131300B4 (en) * 2001-07-02 2012-12-06 Robert Bosch Gmbh Method for protecting a microcomputer system against manipulation of data stored in a memory array and microcomputer system
JP2003023114A (en) * 2001-07-05 2003-01-24 Fujitsu Ltd Semiconductor integrated circuit device and its manufacturing method
US6594194B2 (en) * 2001-07-11 2003-07-15 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Memory array with common word line
JP4157285B2 (en) * 2001-08-31 2008-10-01 株式会社東芝 Nonvolatile semiconductor memory
JP3979486B2 (en) * 2001-09-12 2007-09-19 株式会社ルネサステクノロジ Nonvolatile storage device and data storage method
JP2003099414A (en) * 2001-09-21 2003-04-04 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Semiconductor integrated circuit
GB0123421D0 (en) * 2001-09-28 2001-11-21 Memquest Ltd Power management system
GB0123416D0 (en) 2001-09-28 2001-11-21 Memquest Ltd Non-volatile memory control
GB0123417D0 (en) * 2001-09-28 2001-11-21 Memquest Ltd Improved data processing
GB0123415D0 (en) * 2001-09-28 2001-11-21 Memquest Ltd Method of writing data to non-volatile memory
GB0123410D0 (en) 2001-09-28 2001-11-21 Memquest Ltd Memory system for data storage and retrieval
JP3961806B2 (en) * 2001-10-18 2007-08-22 富士通株式会社 Nonvolatile semiconductor memory device
ITRM20010647A1 (en) * 2001-11-02 2003-05-02 Micron Technology Inc BLOCK CANCELLATION VERIFICATION FOR FLASH MEMORIES.
US6977850B2 (en) * 2001-12-27 2005-12-20 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Semiconductor device having switch circuit to supply voltage
KR100404232B1 (en) * 2002-01-02 2003-11-05 주식회사 하이닉스반도체 micro controller unit
JP2003203997A (en) * 2002-01-07 2003-07-18 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Nonvolatile semiconductor storage device and its manufacturing method
US7209252B2 (en) * 2002-01-15 2007-04-24 Lexmark International, Inc. Memory module, printer assembly, and method for storing printer code
JP2003223792A (en) * 2002-01-25 2003-08-08 Hitachi Ltd Nonvolatile memory and memory card
US7231643B1 (en) 2002-02-22 2007-06-12 Lexar Media, Inc. Image rescue system including direct communication between an application program and a device driver
US7475259B1 (en) 2002-02-28 2009-01-06 The Directv Group, Inc. Multiple nonvolatile memories
US7457967B2 (en) * 2002-02-28 2008-11-25 The Directv Group, Inc. Hidden identification
US7275163B2 (en) * 2002-02-28 2007-09-25 The Directv Group, Inc. Asynchronous configuration
US7437571B1 (en) 2002-02-28 2008-10-14 The Directv Group, Inc. Dedicated nonvolatile memory
KR20030073824A (en) * 2002-03-13 2003-09-19 주식회사 레인콤 A method and apparatus for upgrading a system firmware by using an universal serial bus
US7111109B2 (en) * 2002-03-13 2006-09-19 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Control system, recording device and electronic apparatus
KR100414739B1 (en) * 2002-03-25 2004-01-13 주식회사 하이닉스반도체 Internal voltage generator of semiconductor memory device
JP3989761B2 (en) 2002-04-09 2007-10-10 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Semiconductor display device
US7038239B2 (en) 2002-04-09 2006-05-02 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Semiconductor element and display device using the same
US7411215B2 (en) * 2002-04-15 2008-08-12 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device and method of fabricating the same
JP3989763B2 (en) 2002-04-15 2007-10-10 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Semiconductor display device
US7256421B2 (en) 2002-05-17 2007-08-14 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory, Co., Ltd. Display device having a structure for preventing the deterioration of a light emitting device
JP2004005296A (en) * 2002-06-03 2004-01-08 Motorola Inc Electronic control device
JP2004070407A (en) * 2002-08-01 2004-03-04 Alps Electric Co Ltd Controller of electric appliance and writing method of application program thereto
US8050085B2 (en) * 2002-08-29 2011-11-01 Renesas Electronics Corporation Semiconductor processing device and IC card
JP2004126658A (en) * 2002-09-30 2004-04-22 Toshiba Corp Processor system
US7024570B2 (en) * 2002-10-18 2006-04-04 Infineon Technologies North America Corp. Low-power indicator
ITMI20022668A1 (en) * 2002-12-18 2004-06-19 Simicroelectronics S R L NON-VOLATILE MEMORY DEVICE WITH IMPROVED SPEED
JP2004237667A (en) * 2003-02-07 2004-08-26 Canon Inc Data transfer method
US20050185465A1 (en) * 2003-03-11 2005-08-25 Fujitsu Limited Memory device
JP2004319034A (en) * 2003-04-18 2004-11-11 Renesas Technology Corp Data processor
DE10319271A1 (en) * 2003-04-29 2004-11-25 Infineon Technologies Ag Memory circuitry and manufacturing method
JP4289026B2 (en) * 2003-05-28 2009-07-01 日本電気株式会社 Semiconductor memory device
KR100555506B1 (en) * 2003-07-11 2006-03-03 삼성전자주식회사 Memory device including programmed memory cells and programmable and erasable memory cells
JP2005092963A (en) * 2003-09-16 2005-04-07 Renesas Technology Corp Nonvolatile memory
US6941219B2 (en) 2003-09-30 2005-09-06 Detroit Diesel Corporation Method for recreating valid calibration data for an engine control module
US7607177B2 (en) * 2004-02-23 2009-10-20 Micron Technology, Inc. Secure compact flash
US7725628B1 (en) 2004-04-20 2010-05-25 Lexar Media, Inc. Direct secondary device interface by a host
US7370166B1 (en) * 2004-04-30 2008-05-06 Lexar Media, Inc. Secure portable storage device
KR100532510B1 (en) * 2004-05-04 2005-11-30 삼성전자주식회사 Semiconductor memory device and method for masking data to be written in partial region of memory cell array in write operation of the semiconductor memory device
US7490283B2 (en) * 2004-05-13 2009-02-10 Sandisk Corporation Pipelined data relocation and improved chip architectures
US7464306B1 (en) * 2004-08-27 2008-12-09 Lexar Media, Inc. Status of overall health of nonvolatile memory
US7594063B1 (en) * 2004-08-27 2009-09-22 Lexar Media, Inc. Storage capacity status
US20060044899A1 (en) * 2004-08-27 2006-03-02 Ellis Robert W Method and apparatus for destroying flash memory
US20060054977A1 (en) * 2004-09-16 2006-03-16 Intel Corporation Charge storage memory cell
WO2006033832A2 (en) * 2004-09-21 2006-03-30 Atmel Corporation New compensated method to implement a high voltage discharge phase after erase pulse in a flash memory device
ITMI20041802A1 (en) 2004-09-21 2004-12-21 Atmel Corp "NEW COMPENSATED METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING A HIGH VOLTAGE DISCHARGE PHASE AFTER A CLEARING PULSE IN A FLASH MEMORY DEVICE"
KR100618865B1 (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-08-31 삼성전자주식회사 OTP memory device for multiple programming
EP1650766B1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2008-05-14 Actaris SAS Method for erasing a flash memory and counter comprising a flash memory
DE102004052218B3 (en) * 2004-10-27 2006-04-27 Infineon Technologies Ag Storage assembly e.g. Electrically programmable ROM, has global and local voltage supply lines, where global lines parallel to word lines are coupled to respective local lines that are parallel to bit lines and run within blocks of assembly
JP4759983B2 (en) * 2004-11-04 2011-08-31 船井電機株式会社 Firmware rewriting method for disk device and firmware rewriting program
US7409473B2 (en) 2004-12-21 2008-08-05 Sandisk Corporation Off-chip data relocation
US7849381B2 (en) * 2004-12-21 2010-12-07 Sandisk Corporation Method for copying data in reprogrammable non-volatile memory
US7212440B2 (en) * 2004-12-30 2007-05-01 Sandisk Corporation On-chip data grouping and alignment
JP2006331584A (en) * 2005-05-27 2006-12-07 Renesas Technology Corp Semiconductor integrated circuit and microcomputer
US7668017B2 (en) * 2005-08-17 2010-02-23 Saifun Semiconductors Ltd. Method of erasing non-volatile memory cells
JP2007140733A (en) * 2005-11-16 2007-06-07 Renesas Technology Corp Semiconductor processor and semiconductor integrated circuit
US7502916B2 (en) * 2005-12-02 2009-03-10 Infineon Technologies Flash Gmbh & Co. Kg Processing arrangement, memory card device and method for operating and manufacturing a processing arrangement
KR100784862B1 (en) * 2006-01-09 2007-12-14 삼성전자주식회사 Flash memory device having dummy cell
US7793059B2 (en) * 2006-01-18 2010-09-07 Apple Inc. Interleaving policies for flash memory
US7702935B2 (en) * 2006-01-25 2010-04-20 Apple Inc. Reporting flash memory operating voltages
US20070174641A1 (en) * 2006-01-25 2007-07-26 Cornwell Michael J Adjusting power supplies for data storage devices
US7861122B2 (en) * 2006-01-27 2010-12-28 Apple Inc. Monitoring health of non-volatile memory
US7478213B2 (en) * 2006-03-29 2009-01-13 Atmel Corporation Off-chip micro control and interface in a multichip integrated memory system
US7499369B2 (en) * 2006-07-19 2009-03-03 Sandisk Corporation Method of high-performance flash memory data transfer
US7366028B2 (en) * 2006-04-24 2008-04-29 Sandisk Corporation Method of high-performance flash memory data transfer
US7499339B2 (en) * 2006-07-19 2009-03-03 Sandisk Corporation High-performance flash memory data transfer
US7525855B2 (en) * 2006-04-24 2009-04-28 Sandisk Corporation Method of high-performance flash memory data transfer
US7345926B2 (en) * 2006-04-24 2008-03-18 Sandisk Corporation High-performance flash memory data transfer
US7366029B2 (en) * 2006-04-24 2008-04-29 Sandisk Corporation High-performance flash memory data transfer
US20070248657A1 (en) * 2006-04-25 2007-10-25 Smith David J Multi-compartment transdermal pain control device
JP2008009702A (en) * 2006-06-29 2008-01-17 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Arithmetic processing system
JP4819951B2 (en) * 2006-09-12 2011-11-24 サンディスク コーポレイション Nonvolatile memory and method for linear estimation of initial programming voltage
US7697344B2 (en) * 2006-11-03 2010-04-13 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Memory device and method of operating and fabricating the same
KR100852895B1 (en) * 2006-12-05 2008-08-19 삼성전자주식회사 A complex memory chip and a memory card having the same, and method of manufacturing the memory card
US7613049B2 (en) * 2007-01-08 2009-11-03 Macronix International Co., Ltd Method and system for a serial peripheral interface
JP4434217B2 (en) * 2007-02-14 2010-03-17 株式会社デンソー Charge control device
JP5116337B2 (en) * 2007-03-30 2013-01-09 ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 Semiconductor memory device
US20080288712A1 (en) 2007-04-25 2008-11-20 Cornwell Michael J Accessing metadata with an external host
US7913032B1 (en) 2007-04-25 2011-03-22 Apple Inc. Initiating memory wear leveling
KR100898653B1 (en) * 2007-07-25 2009-05-22 주식회사 하이닉스반도체 Flash memory device and method of programming the same
JP2009080884A (en) * 2007-09-26 2009-04-16 Panasonic Corp Nonvolatile semiconductor memory device
US7532027B2 (en) * 2007-09-28 2009-05-12 Adtron, Inc. Deliberate destruction of integrated circuits
JP5221172B2 (en) * 2008-02-29 2013-06-26 株式会社東芝 NAND-embedded semiconductor time switch
US11342916B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2022-05-24 Schottky Lsi, Inc. Schottky-CMOS asynchronous logic cells
US8476689B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2013-07-02 Augustine Wei-Chun Chang Super CMOS devices on a microelectronics system
US8102724B2 (en) * 2009-01-29 2012-01-24 International Business Machines Corporation Setting controller VREF in a memory controller and memory device interface in a communication bus
US8111564B2 (en) * 2009-01-29 2012-02-07 International Business Machines Corporation Setting controller termination in a memory controller and memory device interface in a communication bus
JP5532671B2 (en) * 2009-05-08 2014-06-25 ソニー株式会社 Data storage system and data storage method, execution device and control method, and control device and control method
TWI490780B (en) * 2010-02-05 2015-07-01 Nat Applied Res Laboratoires Embedded system and accessing data method thereof
JP2011170914A (en) * 2010-02-18 2011-09-01 Elpida Memory Inc Semiconductor device
JP4901968B2 (en) * 2010-03-01 2012-03-21 株式会社東芝 Semiconductor memory device
US8289784B2 (en) 2010-06-15 2012-10-16 International Business Machines Corporation Setting a reference voltage in a memory controller trained to a memory device
US8681571B2 (en) 2010-06-15 2014-03-25 International Business Machines Corporation Training a memory controller and a memory device using multiple read and write operations
US9224496B2 (en) 2010-08-11 2015-12-29 Shine C. Chung Circuit and system of aggregated area anti-fuse in CMOS processes
US8488359B2 (en) * 2010-08-20 2013-07-16 Shine C. Chung Circuit and system of using junction diode as program selector for one-time programmable devices
US10923204B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2021-02-16 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd Fully testible OTP memory
US9824768B2 (en) 2015-03-22 2017-11-21 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd Integrated OTP memory for providing MTP memory
US9496033B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2016-11-15 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd Method and system of programmable resistive devices with read capability using a low supply voltage
US10916317B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2021-02-09 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd Programmable resistance memory on thin film transistor technology
US9236141B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2016-01-12 Shine C. Chung Circuit and system of using junction diode of MOS as program selector for programmable resistive devices
US9070437B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2015-06-30 Shine C. Chung Circuit and system of using junction diode as program selector for one-time programmable devices with heat sink
US9019742B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2015-04-28 Shine C. Chung Multiple-state one-time programmable (OTP) memory to function as multi-time programmable (MTP) memory
US10229746B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2019-03-12 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd OTP memory with high data security
US9818478B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2017-11-14 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd Programmable resistive device and memory using diode as selector
US8830720B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2014-09-09 Shine C. Chung Circuit and system of using junction diode as program selector and MOS as read selector for one-time programmable devices
US9460807B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2016-10-04 Shine C. Chung One-time programmable memory devices using FinFET technology
US8854859B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2014-10-07 Shine C. Chung Programmably reversible resistive device cells using CMOS logic processes
US9042153B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2015-05-26 Shine C. Chung Programmable resistive memory unit with multiple cells to improve yield and reliability
US9711237B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2017-07-18 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd. Method and structure for reliable electrical fuse programming
US10249379B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2019-04-02 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd One-time programmable devices having program selector for electrical fuses with extended area
US9025357B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2015-05-05 Shine C. Chung Programmable resistive memory unit with data and reference cells
US9431127B2 (en) * 2010-08-20 2016-08-30 Shine C. Chung Circuit and system of using junction diode as program selector for metal fuses for one-time programmable devices
US9251893B2 (en) 2010-08-20 2016-02-02 Shine C. Chung Multiple-bit programmable resistive memory using diode as program selector
US8913449B2 (en) 2012-03-11 2014-12-16 Shine C. Chung System and method of in-system repairs or configurations for memories
US9019791B2 (en) 2010-11-03 2015-04-28 Shine C. Chung Low-pin-count non-volatile memory interface for 3D IC
US9076513B2 (en) 2010-11-03 2015-07-07 Shine C. Chung Low-pin-count non-volatile memory interface with soft programming capability
US8988965B2 (en) 2010-11-03 2015-03-24 Shine C. Chung Low-pin-count non-volatile memory interface
AU2016238887B2 (en) * 2010-11-18 2018-08-02 Google Llc Contextual history of computing objects
CN102544011A (en) 2010-12-08 2012-07-04 庄建祥 Anti-fuse memory and electronic system
KR20120080360A (en) 2011-01-07 2012-07-17 에스케이하이닉스 주식회사 Semiconductor memory apparatus and memory system including the same
US9258030B2 (en) * 2011-02-10 2016-02-09 Mediatek Inc. Wireless communication device
US9369172B2 (en) * 2011-02-10 2016-06-14 Mediatek Inc. Wireless communication device
US9713093B2 (en) * 2011-02-10 2017-07-18 Mediatek Inc. Wireless communication device
US8971378B2 (en) * 2011-02-10 2015-03-03 Mediatek Inc. Wireless communication device
US10586832B2 (en) 2011-02-14 2020-03-10 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd One-time programmable devices using gate-all-around structures
US10192615B2 (en) 2011-02-14 2019-01-29 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd One-time programmable devices having a semiconductor fin structure with a divided active region
US8848423B2 (en) 2011-02-14 2014-09-30 Shine C. Chung Circuit and system of using FinFET for building programmable resistive devices
KR101736457B1 (en) * 2011-07-12 2017-05-17 삼성전자주식회사 Nonvolatile memory device, erasing method of nonvolatile memory device, operating method of nonvolatile memory device, memory system including nonvolatile memory device, memory system including nonvolatile memory device, operating method of memory system, and memory card and solid state drive including nonvolatile memory device
US9324849B2 (en) 2011-11-15 2016-04-26 Shine C. Chung Structures and techniques for using semiconductor body to construct SCR, DIAC, or TRIAC
US8912576B2 (en) 2011-11-15 2014-12-16 Shine C. Chung Structures and techniques for using semiconductor body to construct bipolar junction transistors
US9136261B2 (en) 2011-11-15 2015-09-15 Shine C. Chung Structures and techniques for using mesh-structure diodes for electro-static discharge (ESD) protection
US8902625B2 (en) * 2011-11-22 2014-12-02 Marvell World Trade Ltd. Layouts for memory and logic circuits in a system-on-chip
US9007804B2 (en) 2012-02-06 2015-04-14 Shine C. Chung Circuit and system of protective mechanisms for programmable resistive memories
US9053066B2 (en) * 2012-03-30 2015-06-09 Sandisk Technologies Inc. NAND flash memory interface
TWI497515B (en) * 2012-07-10 2015-08-21 Silicon Motion Inc Flash memory controllers and flash memory debug methods
US9135978B2 (en) 2012-07-11 2015-09-15 Micron Technology, Inc. Memory programming methods and memory systems
US20140058532A1 (en) * 2012-08-23 2014-02-27 GM Global Technology Operations LLC Method for partial flashing of ecus
US9076526B2 (en) 2012-09-10 2015-07-07 Shine C. Chung OTP memories functioning as an MTP memory
US9183897B2 (en) 2012-09-30 2015-11-10 Shine C. Chung Circuits and methods of a self-timed high speed SRAM
US9324447B2 (en) 2012-11-20 2016-04-26 Shine C. Chung Circuit and system for concurrently programming multiple bits of OTP memory devices
US9293196B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-03-22 Micron Technology, Inc. Memory cells, memory systems, and memory programming methods
JP6220244B2 (en) * 2013-11-21 2017-10-25 キヤノン株式会社 Electronics
US9412473B2 (en) 2014-06-16 2016-08-09 Shine C. Chung System and method of a novel redundancy scheme for OTP
KR102329267B1 (en) * 2014-09-29 2021-11-22 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Thin film transistor substrate, display apparatus comprising the same, method for manufacturing thin film transistor substrate, and method for manufacturing display apparatus
US9809699B2 (en) * 2015-10-30 2017-11-07 Fina Technology, Inc. Alternative methods to control crosslinking in high impact polystyrene
US10057523B1 (en) 2017-02-13 2018-08-21 Alexander Krymski Image sensors and methods with multiple phase-locked loops and serializers
US10535413B2 (en) 2017-04-14 2020-01-14 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd Low power read operation for programmable resistive memories
US11062786B2 (en) 2017-04-14 2021-07-13 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd One-time programmable memories with low power read operation and novel sensing scheme
US11615859B2 (en) 2017-04-14 2023-03-28 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd One-time programmable memories with ultra-low power read operation and novel sensing scheme
US10726914B2 (en) 2017-04-14 2020-07-28 Attopsemi Technology Co. Ltd Programmable resistive memories with low power read operation and novel sensing scheme
US10770160B2 (en) 2017-11-30 2020-09-08 Attopsemi Technology Co., Ltd Programmable resistive memory formed by bit slices from a standard cell library
JP7212239B2 (en) * 2018-06-05 2023-01-25 ユナイテッド・セミコンダクター・ジャパン株式会社 Nonvolatile semiconductor memory device and rewriting method for nonvolatile semiconductor memory device
US10770119B2 (en) * 2018-12-06 2020-09-08 Macronix International Co., Ltd. Memory circuit
TWI711044B (en) * 2019-07-05 2020-11-21 旺宏電子股份有限公司 Memory device and operating method thereof
US10950290B2 (en) 2019-07-05 2021-03-16 Macronix International Co., Ltd. Memory device and operating method thereof that reduce off current to reduce errors in reading and writing data which have plurality of memory cell blocks and a source voltage generator
CN113055808B (en) * 2021-06-01 2021-08-13 中芯集成电路制造(绍兴)有限公司 Device processing method, MEMS device and processing method thereof, and MEMS microphone
CN113918389B (en) * 2021-12-15 2022-03-11 苏州浪潮智能科技有限公司 double-Flash switching device and server

Citations (48)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4369722A (en) * 1980-02-08 1983-01-25 Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha Control system for a plurality of embroidery sewing machines
US4402065A (en) * 1981-03-11 1983-08-30 Harris Corporation Integrated RAM/EAROM memory system
US4450519A (en) * 1980-11-24 1984-05-22 Texas Instruments Incorporated Psuedo-microprogramming in microprocessor in single-chip microprocessor with alternate IR loading from internal or external program memories
US4578777A (en) * 1983-07-11 1986-03-25 Signetics Corporation One step write circuit arrangement for EEPROMS
US4698750A (en) * 1984-12-27 1987-10-06 Motorola, Inc. Security for integrated circuit microcomputer with EEPROM
US4701886A (en) * 1984-08-22 1987-10-20 Hitachi, Ltd. Semiconductor integrated circuit device
US4783764A (en) * 1984-11-26 1988-11-08 Hitachi, Ltd. Semiconductor integrated circuit device with built-in memories, and peripheral circuit which may be statically or dynamically operated
US4785425A (en) * 1987-02-27 1988-11-15 Emhart Industries, Inc. Electronic locking system
US4794558A (en) * 1979-06-12 1988-12-27 Motorola, Inc. Microprocessor having self-programmed eprom
US4796235A (en) * 1987-07-22 1989-01-03 Motorola, Inc. Write protect mechanism for non-volatile memory
US4807114A (en) * 1985-10-25 1989-02-21 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Microcomputer with internally and externally programmed eprom
US4887234A (en) * 1985-11-30 1989-12-12 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Portable electronic device with plural memory areas
US4922451A (en) * 1987-03-23 1990-05-01 International Business Machines Corporation Memory re-mapping in a microcomputer system
US4930107A (en) * 1988-08-08 1990-05-29 Altera Corporation Method and apparatus for programming and verifying programmable elements in programmable devices
US4931997A (en) * 1987-03-16 1990-06-05 Hitachi Ltd. Semiconductor memory having storage buffer to save control data during bulk erase
US4953129A (en) * 1988-07-29 1990-08-28 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Nonvolatile semiconductor memory device capable of reliably writing data and a data writing method therefor
US4974208A (en) * 1985-04-23 1990-11-27 Hitachi, Ltd. Microcomputer incorporating a nonvolatile semiconductor memory
US4975878A (en) * 1988-01-28 1990-12-04 National Semiconductor Programmable memory data protection scheme
US5065364A (en) * 1989-09-15 1991-11-12 Intel Corporation Apparatus for providing block erasing in a flash EPROM
US5070473A (en) * 1986-08-22 1991-12-03 Hitachi, Ltd. Microprocessor
US5088023A (en) * 1984-03-23 1992-02-11 Hitachi, Ltd. Integrated circuit having processor coupled by common bus to programmable read only memory for processor operation and processor uncoupled from common bus when programming read only memory from external device
US5093909A (en) * 1988-12-14 1992-03-03 Nec Corporation Single-chip microcomputer including an eprom capable of accommodating different memory capacities by address boundary discrimination
US5097445A (en) * 1989-03-03 1992-03-17 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Semiconductor integrated circuit with selective read and write inhibiting
US5175840A (en) * 1985-10-02 1992-12-29 Hitachi, Ltd. Microcomputer having a PROM including data security and test circuitry
US5185718A (en) * 1991-02-19 1993-02-09 Catalyst Semiconductor Corporation Memory array architecture for flash memory
US5199001A (en) * 1990-10-29 1993-03-30 Intel Corporation Architecture for erasing very small areas of flash EPROMs
US5200600A (en) * 1988-08-29 1993-04-06 Hitachi Maxell, Ltd. IC card and method for writing information therein
US5222046A (en) * 1988-02-17 1993-06-22 Intel Corporation Processor controlled command port architecture for flash memory
US5255237A (en) * 1991-04-10 1993-10-19 Nec Corporation Method of erasing a nonvolatile semiconductor storage
US5255244A (en) * 1991-06-21 1993-10-19 National Semiconductor Corporation Method and apparatus for serially programming an on-chip EPROM in a microcontroller
US5280626A (en) * 1987-12-02 1994-01-18 Hitachi, Ltd. Multi-process emulator suitable for testing software under multi-process environments
US5283758A (en) * 1989-06-13 1994-02-01 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Non-volatile semiconductor memory device
US5297096A (en) * 1990-06-15 1994-03-22 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Nonvolatile semiconductor memory device and data erasing method thereof
US5305276A (en) * 1991-09-11 1994-04-19 Rohm Co., Ltd. Non-volatile IC memory
US5305284A (en) * 1991-11-21 1994-04-19 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Semiconductor memory device
US5321845A (en) * 1987-09-09 1994-06-14 Hitachi, Ltd. Single-chip microcomputer including non-volatile memory elements
US5329492A (en) * 1991-11-20 1994-07-12 Fujitsu Limited Semiconductor memory device having improved connections between word lines and memory cell array blocks
US5369647A (en) * 1991-12-16 1994-11-29 Intel Corporation Circuitry and method for testing a write state machine
US5377145A (en) * 1991-02-11 1994-12-27 Intel Corporation Circuitry and method for programming and erasing a non-volatile semiconductor memory
US5390146A (en) * 1989-06-12 1995-02-14 Intel Corporation Reference switching circuit for flash EPROM
US5402383A (en) * 1992-10-06 1995-03-28 Fujitsu Limited Electrically erasable non-volatile semiconductor memory device for selective use in boot block type or normal type flash memory devices
US5418752A (en) * 1989-04-13 1995-05-23 Sundisk Corporation Flash EEPROM system with erase sector select
US5444664A (en) * 1993-07-13 1995-08-22 Hitachi, Ltd. Flash memory and a microcomputer
US5566125A (en) * 1994-01-21 1996-10-15 Intel Corporation Method and circuitry for storing discrete amounts of charge in a single memory element
US5581503A (en) * 1992-03-17 1996-12-03 Hitachi, Ltd. Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US5592613A (en) * 1989-03-28 1997-01-07 Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Microcomputer having a program correction function
US5602738A (en) * 1990-02-01 1997-02-11 Hitachi, Ltd. Control apparatus for automobile engine including microcomputer which may be programmed after mounting on a circuit board
US5615159A (en) * 1995-11-28 1997-03-25 Micron Quantum Devices, Inc. Memory system with non-volatile data storage unit and method of initializing same

Family Cites Families (43)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS55115729A (en) * 1979-02-28 1980-09-05 Toshiba Corp Mos transistor circuit
JPS5929448A (en) * 1982-08-11 1984-02-16 Nec Corp Programmable read only memory
JPS5971179A (en) 1982-10-16 1984-04-21 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Edition processing method of ic card
JPS60163592U (en) * 1984-04-07 1985-10-30 ソニー株式会社 Vehicle optical disc player
JPS60254344A (en) 1984-05-31 1985-12-16 Toshiba Corp Assigning method of memory address
JPH0661109B2 (en) 1984-06-01 1994-08-10 富士通株式会社 One-chip microcomputer capable of writing to built-in EPROM
DE3532744A1 (en) * 1985-09-13 1987-03-26 Vdo Schindling ARRANGEMENT FOR PROGRAMMING A FIXED MEMORY
JPS62117633A (en) * 1985-11-15 1987-05-29 Toyota Motor Corp Production of monolithic catalyst
JPS63206852A (en) * 1987-02-24 1988-08-26 Hitachi Maxell Ltd Single chip lsi
JP3032207B2 (en) 1987-04-24 2000-04-10 株式会社日立製作所 Micro computer
JP2556324B2 (en) 1987-05-19 1996-11-20 日立マクセル株式会社 IC card
DE3852965T3 (en) 1987-05-19 2000-06-21 Hitachi Maxell Information processing system with IC card.
EP0316549A2 (en) * 1987-11-03 1989-05-24 Motorola, Inc. A single-chip microprocessor having secure on-chip PROM
US4823871A (en) * 1988-02-24 1989-04-25 Cameron Iron Works Usa, Inc. Hanger and seal assembly
JP2644270B2 (en) * 1988-04-25 1997-08-25 株式会社日立製作所 Semiconductor storage device
JPH01298600A (en) * 1988-05-26 1989-12-01 Toshiba Corp Semiconductor memory
JPH028955A (en) * 1988-06-28 1990-01-12 Canon Inc Document processor
JPH0289555A (en) * 1988-09-23 1990-03-29 Honda Motor Co Ltd Low pressure casting apparatus
JPH07105140B2 (en) * 1988-12-16 1995-11-13 日本電気株式会社 Semiconductor memory
US5844842A (en) * 1989-02-06 1998-12-01 Hitachi, Ltd. Nonvolatile semiconductor memory device
JP2654596B2 (en) * 1989-02-06 1997-09-17 株式会社日立製作所 Non-volatile storage device
JPH0770691B2 (en) * 1989-03-15 1995-07-31 シャープ株式会社 Semiconductor memory device
JPH02310786A (en) * 1989-05-26 1990-12-26 Nec Ic Microcomput Syst Ltd Microcomputer
JP2504831B2 (en) * 1989-06-13 1996-06-05 三菱電機株式会社 Nonvolatile semiconductor memory device
KR100204721B1 (en) 1989-08-18 1999-06-15 가나이 쓰도무 Electrically erasable semiconductor memory device with divided memory cell array
JPH0378195A (en) * 1989-08-21 1991-04-03 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Microcomputer device incorporating eprom
JPH03223979A (en) 1989-12-07 1991-10-02 Hitachi Ltd Microprocessor ad peripheral function setting method for the same
JP2926808B2 (en) * 1989-12-16 1999-07-28 三菱電機株式会社 Semiconductor memory device
JP2817988B2 (en) 1990-02-20 1998-10-30 株式会社ニツセン Method and apparatus for removing cheese loaded in carrier for dyeing
JP2624864B2 (en) * 1990-02-28 1997-06-25 株式会社東芝 Non-volatile semiconductor memory
JPH04109496A (en) 1990-08-29 1992-04-10 Mitsubishi Electric Corp Semiconductor memory device
DE69021732T2 (en) * 1990-12-04 1996-01-18 Hewlett Packard Ltd Reprogrammable data storage system.
US5222040A (en) * 1990-12-11 1993-06-22 Nexcom Technology, Inc. Single transistor eeprom memory cell
JP3223979B2 (en) 1991-01-17 2001-10-29 ヤマハ株式会社 Electronic musical instrument parameter input device
DE4101686A1 (en) * 1991-01-22 1992-07-23 Merck Patent Gmbh INDOLDER DERIVATIVES
US5337273A (en) * 1993-07-30 1994-08-09 Sgs-Thomson Microelectronics, Inc. Charge sharing flash clear for memory arrays
JP3229955B2 (en) 1993-09-27 2001-11-19 経済産業省産業技術総合研究所長 Oil film thickness measuring device
JP3014272B2 (en) 1994-06-15 2000-02-28 東北リコー株式会社 Small-size printed matter discharge storage device and its cleaning sheet
JP3014272U (en) 1994-07-14 1995-08-08 エス ウァン エル Water faucet or shower head
JP3187263B2 (en) 1994-11-09 2001-07-11 株式会社ロッテ Low tack gum base and chewing gum
JP3078195B2 (en) 1995-01-18 2000-08-21 矢崎総業株式会社 Operation lever structure
JP3250495B2 (en) 1997-09-10 2002-01-28 日本電気株式会社 Semiconductor structure and semiconductor crystal growth method
CN102027308A (en) 2008-05-16 2011-04-20 开利公司 Microchannel heat exchanger with enhanced refrigerant distribution

Patent Citations (50)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4794558A (en) * 1979-06-12 1988-12-27 Motorola, Inc. Microprocessor having self-programmed eprom
US4369722A (en) * 1980-02-08 1983-01-25 Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha Control system for a plurality of embroidery sewing machines
US4450519A (en) * 1980-11-24 1984-05-22 Texas Instruments Incorporated Psuedo-microprogramming in microprocessor in single-chip microprocessor with alternate IR loading from internal or external program memories
US4402065A (en) * 1981-03-11 1983-08-30 Harris Corporation Integrated RAM/EAROM memory system
US4578777A (en) * 1983-07-11 1986-03-25 Signetics Corporation One step write circuit arrangement for EEPROMS
US5088023A (en) * 1984-03-23 1992-02-11 Hitachi, Ltd. Integrated circuit having processor coupled by common bus to programmable read only memory for processor operation and processor uncoupled from common bus when programming read only memory from external device
US5109359A (en) * 1984-08-22 1992-04-28 Hitachi, Ltd. Method of controlling a semiconductor integrated circuit
US4701886A (en) * 1984-08-22 1987-10-20 Hitachi, Ltd. Semiconductor integrated circuit device
US4783764A (en) * 1984-11-26 1988-11-08 Hitachi, Ltd. Semiconductor integrated circuit device with built-in memories, and peripheral circuit which may be statically or dynamically operated
US4698750A (en) * 1984-12-27 1987-10-06 Motorola, Inc. Security for integrated circuit microcomputer with EEPROM
US4974208A (en) * 1985-04-23 1990-11-27 Hitachi, Ltd. Microcomputer incorporating a nonvolatile semiconductor memory
US5175840A (en) * 1985-10-02 1992-12-29 Hitachi, Ltd. Microcomputer having a PROM including data security and test circuitry
US4807114A (en) * 1985-10-25 1989-02-21 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Microcomputer with internally and externally programmed eprom
US4887234A (en) * 1985-11-30 1989-12-12 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Portable electronic device with plural memory areas
US5070473A (en) * 1986-08-22 1991-12-03 Hitachi, Ltd. Microprocessor
US4785425A (en) * 1987-02-27 1988-11-15 Emhart Industries, Inc. Electronic locking system
US4931997A (en) * 1987-03-16 1990-06-05 Hitachi Ltd. Semiconductor memory having storage buffer to save control data during bulk erase
US4922451A (en) * 1987-03-23 1990-05-01 International Business Machines Corporation Memory re-mapping in a microcomputer system
US4796235A (en) * 1987-07-22 1989-01-03 Motorola, Inc. Write protect mechanism for non-volatile memory
US5321845A (en) * 1987-09-09 1994-06-14 Hitachi, Ltd. Single-chip microcomputer including non-volatile memory elements
US5280626A (en) * 1987-12-02 1994-01-18 Hitachi, Ltd. Multi-process emulator suitable for testing software under multi-process environments
US4975878A (en) * 1988-01-28 1990-12-04 National Semiconductor Programmable memory data protection scheme
US5222046A (en) * 1988-02-17 1993-06-22 Intel Corporation Processor controlled command port architecture for flash memory
US4953129A (en) * 1988-07-29 1990-08-28 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Nonvolatile semiconductor memory device capable of reliably writing data and a data writing method therefor
US4930107A (en) * 1988-08-08 1990-05-29 Altera Corporation Method and apparatus for programming and verifying programmable elements in programmable devices
US5200600A (en) * 1988-08-29 1993-04-06 Hitachi Maxell, Ltd. IC card and method for writing information therein
US5093909A (en) * 1988-12-14 1992-03-03 Nec Corporation Single-chip microcomputer including an eprom capable of accommodating different memory capacities by address boundary discrimination
US5097445A (en) * 1989-03-03 1992-03-17 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Semiconductor integrated circuit with selective read and write inhibiting
US5592613A (en) * 1989-03-28 1997-01-07 Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Microcomputer having a program correction function
US5418752A (en) * 1989-04-13 1995-05-23 Sundisk Corporation Flash EEPROM system with erase sector select
US5390146A (en) * 1989-06-12 1995-02-14 Intel Corporation Reference switching circuit for flash EPROM
US5283758A (en) * 1989-06-13 1994-02-01 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Non-volatile semiconductor memory device
US5065364A (en) * 1989-09-15 1991-11-12 Intel Corporation Apparatus for providing block erasing in a flash EPROM
US5602738A (en) * 1990-02-01 1997-02-11 Hitachi, Ltd. Control apparatus for automobile engine including microcomputer which may be programmed after mounting on a circuit board
US5297096A (en) * 1990-06-15 1994-03-22 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Nonvolatile semiconductor memory device and data erasing method thereof
US5199001A (en) * 1990-10-29 1993-03-30 Intel Corporation Architecture for erasing very small areas of flash EPROMs
US5377145A (en) * 1991-02-11 1994-12-27 Intel Corporation Circuitry and method for programming and erasing a non-volatile semiconductor memory
US5185718A (en) * 1991-02-19 1993-02-09 Catalyst Semiconductor Corporation Memory array architecture for flash memory
US5255237A (en) * 1991-04-10 1993-10-19 Nec Corporation Method of erasing a nonvolatile semiconductor storage
US5255244A (en) * 1991-06-21 1993-10-19 National Semiconductor Corporation Method and apparatus for serially programming an on-chip EPROM in a microcontroller
US5305276A (en) * 1991-09-11 1994-04-19 Rohm Co., Ltd. Non-volatile IC memory
US5329492A (en) * 1991-11-20 1994-07-12 Fujitsu Limited Semiconductor memory device having improved connections between word lines and memory cell array blocks
US5305284A (en) * 1991-11-21 1994-04-19 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Semiconductor memory device
US5369647A (en) * 1991-12-16 1994-11-29 Intel Corporation Circuitry and method for testing a write state machine
US5581503A (en) * 1992-03-17 1996-12-03 Hitachi, Ltd. Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US5768194A (en) * 1992-03-17 1998-06-16 Hitachi, Ltd. Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US5402383A (en) * 1992-10-06 1995-03-28 Fujitsu Limited Electrically erasable non-volatile semiconductor memory device for selective use in boot block type or normal type flash memory devices
US5444664A (en) * 1993-07-13 1995-08-22 Hitachi, Ltd. Flash memory and a microcomputer
US5566125A (en) * 1994-01-21 1996-10-15 Intel Corporation Method and circuitry for storing discrete amounts of charge in a single memory element
US5615159A (en) * 1995-11-28 1997-03-25 Micron Quantum Devices, Inc. Memory system with non-volatile data storage unit and method of initializing same

Cited By (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050154582A1 (en) * 2003-12-19 2005-07-14 Oce-Technologies B.V. Erasing a stored information pattern on a storage medium
US8018617B2 (en) * 2003-12-19 2011-09-13 Oce-Technologies B.V. Erasing a stored information pattern on a storage medium
US8069328B2 (en) * 2006-03-28 2011-11-29 Mosaid Technologies Incorporated Daisy chain cascade configuration recognition technique
EP1865554A1 (en) * 2006-06-09 2007-12-12 Austriamicrosystems AG Semiconductor memory device and method for operation
US7599229B2 (en) * 2006-06-21 2009-10-06 Macronix International Co., Ltd. Methods and structures for expanding a memory operation window and reducing a second bit effect
US20070297240A1 (en) * 2006-06-21 2007-12-27 Macronix International Co., Ltd. Methods and Structures for Expanding a Memory Operation Window and Reducing a Second Bit Effect
US7684252B2 (en) 2006-06-21 2010-03-23 Macronix International Co., Ltd. Method and structure for operating memory devices on fringes of control gate
US20070297241A1 (en) * 2006-06-21 2007-12-27 Macronix International Co., Ltd. Method and Structure for Operating Memory Devices on Fringes of Control Gate
US7486561B2 (en) * 2006-06-22 2009-02-03 Sandisk Corporation Method for non-real time reprogramming of non-volatile memory to achieve tighter distribution of threshold voltages
US7489549B2 (en) * 2006-06-22 2009-02-10 Sandisk Corporation System for non-real time reprogramming of non-volatile memory to achieve tighter distribution of threshold voltages
US20070297226A1 (en) * 2006-06-22 2007-12-27 Nima Mokhlesi Method for non-real time reprogramming of non-volatile memory to achieve tighter distribution of threshold voltages
US7633802B2 (en) 2006-06-22 2009-12-15 Sandisk Corporation Non-real time reprogramming of non-volatile memory to achieve tighter distribution of threshold voltages
US20070297245A1 (en) * 2006-06-22 2007-12-27 Nima Mokhlesi System for non-real time reprogramming of non-volatile memory to achieve tighter distribution of threshold voltages
US20090265792A1 (en) * 2008-04-21 2009-10-22 Martinez Ricardo L Memory security override protection for manufacturability of information handling systems
US8132253B2 (en) * 2008-04-21 2012-03-06 Dell Products L.P. Memory security override protection for manufacturability of information handling systems
US10359961B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2019-07-23 Toshiba Memory Corporation Storage device
US20200142606A1 (en) * 2015-11-06 2020-05-07 SK Hynix Inc. Memory device and method of operating the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20020051382A1 (en) 2002-05-02
DE69332422D1 (en) 2002-11-21
US20080028134A1 (en) 2008-01-31
US7295476B2 (en) 2007-11-13
US6166953A (en) 2000-12-26
KR100276474B1 (en) 2001-01-15
US6064593A (en) 2000-05-16
US6026020A (en) 2000-02-15
US7965563B2 (en) 2011-06-21
EP1094470B1 (en) 2003-08-13
TW231343B (en) 1994-10-01
DE69325533T2 (en) 2000-03-23
EP0561271B1 (en) 1999-07-07
US6400609B1 (en) 2002-06-04
US6493271B2 (en) 2002-12-10
US6130836A (en) 2000-10-10
US20070133308A1 (en) 2007-06-14
US20060034129A1 (en) 2006-02-16
DE69333151T2 (en) 2004-06-03
US20020181289A1 (en) 2002-12-05
US5581503A (en) 1996-12-03
US20020048189A1 (en) 2002-04-25
US6181598B1 (en) 2001-01-30
DE69333151D1 (en) 2003-09-18
EP0893799A3 (en) 1999-05-19
EP0902436B1 (en) 2002-10-16
EP1094470A1 (en) 2001-04-25
US6804152B2 (en) 2004-10-12
KR930020466A (en) 1993-10-19
US5768194A (en) 1998-06-16
US6335879B1 (en) 2002-01-01
EP0893799B1 (en) 2002-12-04
US20090157953A1 (en) 2009-06-18
US7184321B2 (en) 2007-02-27
EP0893799A2 (en) 1999-01-27
US7505329B2 (en) 2009-03-17
DE69325533D1 (en) 1999-08-12
DE69332551D1 (en) 2003-01-16
DE69332422T2 (en) 2003-06-26
EP0902436A2 (en) 1999-03-17
EP0561271A2 (en) 1993-09-22
US6999350B2 (en) 2006-02-14
EP0561271A3 (en) 1995-07-26
DE69332551T2 (en) 2003-08-14
US6690603B2 (en) 2004-02-10
EP0902436A3 (en) 1999-05-19
US20030021157A1 (en) 2003-01-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6999350B2 (en) Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
US7092296B2 (en) Nonvolatile semiconductor memory
JPH08503328A (en) Remote reprogrammable program memory for microcontrollers
JP3534781B2 (en) Microcomputer and flash memory
US7057937B1 (en) Data processing apparatus having a flash memory built-in which is rewritable by use of external device
EP0617377A2 (en) Microcomputer with flash memory
US6414878B2 (en) Data line disturbance free memory block divided flash memory and microcomputer having flash memory therein
JP2004342187A (en) Semiconductor integrated circuit and microcomputer
JP2003151288A (en) Microcomputer and flash memory
JP4678957B2 (en) Nonvolatile memory array, microcomputer and microcomputer program rewriting method
JP2004246923A (en) Microcomputer
JP2003076672A (en) Microcomputer
JP2002304894A (en) Manufacturing method for printed circuit board
JPH086919A (en) Microcomputer

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: PAYOR NUMBER ASSIGNED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: ASPN); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 4

AS Assignment

Owner name: RENESAS TECHNOLOGY CORP.,JAPAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:HITACHI, LTD.;REEL/FRAME:024006/0641

Effective date: 20060721

Owner name: HITACHI ULSI ENGINEERING CORPORATION,JAPAN

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:HITACHI VLSI ENGINEERING CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:024006/0661

Effective date: 19930821

Owner name: HITACHI ULSI SYSTEMS CO., LTD.,JAPAN

Free format text: MERGER;ASSIGNOR:HITACHI ULSI ENGINEERING CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:024016/0653

Effective date: 19980401

Owner name: RENESAS TECHNOLOGY CORP., JAPAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:HITACHI, LTD.;REEL/FRAME:024006/0641

Effective date: 20060721

Owner name: HITACHI ULSI ENGINEERING CORPORATION, JAPAN

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:HITACHI VLSI ENGINEERING CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:024006/0661

Effective date: 19930821

Owner name: HITACHI ULSI SYSTEMS CO., LTD., JAPAN

Free format text: MERGER;ASSIGNOR:HITACHI ULSI ENGINEERING CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:024016/0653

Effective date: 19980401

AS Assignment

Owner name: RENESAS ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, JAPAN

Free format text: MERGER/CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:RENESAS TECHNOLOGY CORP.;REEL/FRAME:026837/0505

Effective date: 20100401

REMI Maintenance fee reminder mailed
LAPS Lapse for failure to pay maintenance fees
STCH Information on status: patent discontinuation

Free format text: PATENT EXPIRED DUE TO NONPAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEES UNDER 37 CFR 1.362

FP Lapsed due to failure to pay maintenance fee

Effective date: 20140214